Engine Control System: Section
Engine Control System: Section
Engine Control System: Section
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
QR TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ........................................... 39 F
INDEX FOR DTC.........................................................9 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.......................................39
Alphabetical Index.............................................................9 DTC Inspection Priority Chart.........................................42
DTC No. Index................................................................10 Fail-safe Chart ....................................................... 43 G
Basic Inspection...............................................................45
PRECAUTIONS.........................................................13
Symptom Matrix Chart....................................................50
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
"AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONER"....13 Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 54....
H
Circuit Diagram...............................................................59
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout.....................61
A/T...................................................................................13 ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................61
Precaution........................................................................13 CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 68 I
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis........................16
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
PREPARATION.........................................................17
... 79
Special Service Tools......................................................17
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor J
Commercial Service Tools..............................................17 Mode................................................................................82
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...................................19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.....84
System Diagram (Models with Three Way Catalyst.).........19
Description ............................................................. 84
System Diagram (Models without Three Way Cat- alyst) Testing Condition............................................................84 K
.........................................................................................20 Inspection Procedure.......................................................84
Vacuum Hose Drawing....................................................21 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................85
System Chart....................................................................22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENTINCI- L
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................22 DENT.........................................................................88
Electronic Ignition (EI) System.......................................25 Description.......................................................................88
Air Conditioning Cut Control..........................................25 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 88 M
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed). .26 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM.....................89
Can communication (A/T models)..................................26 Wiring Diagram...............................................................89
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE...............................27 ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................90
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................27 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................90
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning................28 Component Inspection.....................................................94
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning........................28 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE..............95
Idle Air Volume Learning...............................................28 Description.......................................................................95
Fuel Pressure Check........................................................31 On Board Diagnosis Logic..............................................95
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM.............33 DTC Confirmation Procedure..........................................95
Introduction.....................................................................33 Wiring Diagram...............................................................96
Two Trip Detection Logic...............................................33 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................97
Emission-related Diagnostic Information........................33 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER........................98
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)...................................35 Description.......................................................................98
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................36 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
... 98
ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................98
EC-1
On Board Diagnosis Logic...............................................99 Wiring Diagram.............................................................133
DTC Confirmation Procedure..........................................99 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................134
Wiring Diagram.............................................................100 DTCP0172FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION.137
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................101 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................137
Component Inspection....................................................102 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................137
Removal and Installation................................................102 Wiring Diagram.............................................................139
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................103 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................140
Component Description..................................................103 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR........................................143
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description.................................................143
. 103 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................103 .143
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................103 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................143
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................104 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................144
Wiring Diagram.............................................................105 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................144
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................106 Wiring Diagram.............................................................145
Component Inspection....................................................108 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................146
Removal and Installation................................................108 Component Inspection...................................................147
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR...........................109 Remove and Installation.................................................148
Component Description..................................................109 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR............................149
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................109 Component Description.................................................149
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................109 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram.............................................................111 .149
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................112 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................149
Component Inspection....................................................113 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................149
Removal and Installation................................................113 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................150
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR..........................114 Wiring Diagram.............................................................151
Component Description..................................................114 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................152
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................114 Component Inspection...................................................153
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................115 Remove and Installation.................................................154
Wiring Diagram.............................................................116 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR......................................155
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................117 Component Description.................................................155
Component Inspection....................................................118 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation................................................118 .155
DTC P0132 HO2S1.................................................119 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................155
Component Description..................................................119 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................156
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................156
. 119 Wiring Diagram.............................................................157
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................119 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................158
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................120 Component Inspection...................................................160
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................120 Remove and Installation.................................................160
Wiring Diagram.............................................................121 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR..........................161
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................122 Component Description.................................................161
Component Inspection....................................................123 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation................................................124 .161
DTC P0134 HO2S1.................................................125 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................161
Component Description..................................................125 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................161
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................162
. 125 Wiring Diagram.............................................................163
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................125 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................164
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................126 Component Inspection...................................................166
Overall Function Check.................................................126 Remove and Installation.................................................166
Wiring Diagram.............................................................127 DTC P0327, P0328 KS............................................167
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................128 Component Description.................................................167
Component Inspection....................................................129 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................167
Removal and Installation................................................130 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................167
DTCP0171FUELINJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 131 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................167
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................131 Wiring Diagram.............................................................169
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................131 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................170
EC-2
Component Inspection...................................................171 Overall Function Check.................................................206
Removal and Installation...............................................171 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 207 A
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)...........................172 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................208
Component Description.................................................172 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY........................210
EC
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description..................................................210
. 172 ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................210
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................172 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................210
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................173 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................210
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................173 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 212 C
Wiring Diagram.............................................................174 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................213
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................175 DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL.....................................215
Component Inspection...................................................177 Description ........................................................... 215 D
Removal and Installation...............................................177 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).....................178 . 215
Component Description.................................................178 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 215. .E On
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................178 Board Diagnosis Logic..................................................216
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................178 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................216
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................179 Overall Function Check.................................................217
Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 217 F
Wiring Diagram.............................................................180
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................181 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.....219
Component Inspection...................................................183 Component Description.................................................219
Removal and Installation...............................................183 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode G
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL...............................184 . 219
Component Description.................................................184 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................219
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................184 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 219 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................184 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................220
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................185 Wiring Diagram.............................................................221
Wiring Diagram.............................................................186 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................222
I
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................188 Component Inspection ......................................... 223
Component Inspection...................................................191 Removal and Installation...............................................223
Removal and Installation...............................................192 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
DTC P0500 VSS......................................................193 ACTUATOR ............................................................ 224 J
Component Description.................................................193 Description....................................................................224
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................193 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................224
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................193 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 224 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................193 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................225
Overall Function Check.................................................194 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Wiring Diagram.............................................................195 FUNCTION ............................................................. 226
Description....................................................................226 L
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................197
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR......................................198 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description.................................................198 . 226
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 226. .M On
. 198 Board Diagnosis Logic..................................................226
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................198 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................227
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................198 Wiring Diagram.............................................................228
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................198 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................229
Wiring Diagram.............................................................200 Remove and Installation................................................232
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................201 DTC P1124,P1126 THROTTLE CONTROLMOTOR
Component Inspection...................................................202 RELAY.....................................................................233
DTC P0605 ECM.....................................................203 Component Description.................................................233
Component Description.................................................203 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................203 . 233
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................203 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................233
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................205 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................233
DTC P0650 MIL.......................................................206 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................233
Component Description.................................................206 Wiring Diagram.............................................................235
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................206 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................236
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................206 Component Inspection...................................................237
EC-3
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR.........238 Wiring Diagram.............................................................274
Component Description..................................................238 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................275
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................238 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH.................277
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................238 Component Description.................................................277
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................238 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram.............................................................240 .277
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................241 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................277
Component Inspection....................................................242 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................278
Remove and Installation.................................................242 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................278
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE........243 Wiring Diagram.............................................................279
System Description........................................................243 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................281
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection...................................................282
. 243 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH......................284
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................244 Component Description.................................................284
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................244 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Overall Function Check.................................................244 .284
Wiring Diagram.............................................................247 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................284
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................248 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................284
Main 12 Causes of Overheating.....................................255 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................285
Component Inspection....................................................256 Wiring Diagram.............................................................287
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR............................257 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................288
Component Description..................................................257 Component Inspection...................................................293
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR......295
. 257 Component Description.................................................295
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................257 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................295
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................257 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................295
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................258 Wiring Diagram.............................................................296
Wiring Diagram.............................................................259 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................298
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................260 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH.......................................300
Component Inspection....................................................261 Component Description.................................................300
Remove and Installation.................................................262 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.........................................263 .300
Component Description..................................................263 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................300
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................263 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................300
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................263 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................300
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................264 Overall Function Check.................................................301
Remove and Installation.................................................264 Wiring Diagram.............................................................302
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.........................................265 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................303
Component Description..................................................265 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH.................................304
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................265 Description.....................................................................304
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................265 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................266 .304
Remove and Installation.................................................266 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................304
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR..........................267 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................304
Component Description..................................................267 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................304
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram.............................................................306
. 267 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................307
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................267 Component Inspection...................................................308
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................267 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR.........................310
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................268 Component Description.................................................310
Wiring Diagram.............................................................269 Wiring Diagram.............................................................311
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................270 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................312
Component Inspection....................................................272 Component Inspection...................................................314
Remove and Installation.................................................272 HO2S1.....................................................................315
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY................273 Component Description.................................................315
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................273 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................273 .315
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................315
EC-4
Wiring Diagram.............................................................316 Wiring Diagram.............................................................357
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................317 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 360 A
Component Inspection...................................................318 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH..........................................366
Removal and Installation...............................................320 Component Description.................................................366
EC
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
SOLENOID VALVE.................................................321 . 366
Description....................................................................321 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................366
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram.............................................................367
. 321 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 368 C
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................321 ASCD INDICATOR..................................................374
Wiring Diagram.............................................................323 Component Description.................................................374
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................324 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode D
Component Inspection...................................................327 . 374
Removal and Installation...............................................327 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................374
VIAS........................................................................328 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 375 E
Description....................................................................328 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................377
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DATA LINK CONNECTOR......................................379
. 329 Wiring Diagram.............................................................379
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................329 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .................... 380 F
Wiring Diagram.............................................................330 Description....................................................................380
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................331 Component Inspection...................................................382
Component Inspection...................................................334 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION .............. 383 G
Removal and Installation...............................................335 Description....................................................................383
INJECTOR CIRCUIT...............................................336 Component Inspection...................................................383
Component Description.................................................336 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 385 H
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode System Description........................................................385
. 336 Component Description.................................................386
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................336 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)....387
I
Wiring Diagram.............................................................337 Fuel Pressure ...................................................... 387
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................338 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing.....................................387
Component Inspection...................................................340 Mass Air Flow Sensor...................................................387
Removal and Installation...............................................340 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 387...J Engine
START SIGNAL......................................................341 Coolant Temperature Sensor.........................................387
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater....................................387
. 341 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 387 K
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................341 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)..............................387
Wiring Diagram.............................................................342 Throttle Control Motor..................................................387
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................343 Injector ................................................................. 387
Fuel Pump......................................................................387 L
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT.............................................345
Description....................................................................345
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode YD
. 345 M
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................345 INDEX FOR DTC.....................................................388
Wiring Diagram.............................................................347 Alphabetical Index.........................................................388
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................348 DTC No. Index..............................................................388
Component Inspection...................................................350 PRECAUTIONS.......................................................390
Removal and Installation...............................................351 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................352 "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONER"..390
Component Description.................................................352 Precautions....................................................................390
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................352 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis......................392
Wiring Diagram.............................................................353 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM.................................393
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................354 System Diagram............................................................393
Removal and Installation...............................................355 System Chart.................................................................394
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.................................356 Fuel Injection Control System.......................................394
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Fuel Injection Timing Control System..........................396
. 356 Air Conditioning Cut Control........................................396
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................356
EC-5
Fuel Cut Control (At No Load & High Engine Speed). 396 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................451
Crankcase Ventilation System.......................................397 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................452
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................398 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................452
Fuel Filter......................................................................398 Wiring Diagram.............................................................453
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning..............398 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................454
Fuel Pressure Relief Valve............................................399 Component Inspection...................................................457
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM...........401 Removal and Installation...............................................458
DTC and MIL Detection Logic.....................................401 DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)...................................401 SENSOR..................................................................459
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System).................................401 Description....................................................................459
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)...............................402 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..........................................404 .459
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.....................................404 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................459
Basic Inspection.............................................................407 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................459
Symptom Matrix Chart..................................................411 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................459
Engine Control Component Parts Location...................415 Wiring Diagram.............................................................460
Circuit Diagram.............................................................418 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................461
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...................420 Component Inspection...................................................462
ECM Terminals And Reference Value..........................420 Removal and Installation...............................................462
CONSULT-II Function.................................................426 DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR...................463
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Description....................................................................463
. 431 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode434 .463
TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENTINCI- ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................463
DENT.......................................................................435 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................464
Description....................................................................435 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................465
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................435 Wiring Diagram.............................................................466
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM...................436 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................468
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................436 Component Inspection...................................................469
Wiring Diagram.............................................................437 Removal and Installation...............................................469
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................438 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
Component Inspection...................................................441 (TDC).......................................................................470
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) . 442 Description....................................................................470
Component Description.................................................442 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .470
. 442 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................470
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................442 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................471
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................443 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................471
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................443 Wiring Diagram.............................................................472
Wiring Diagram.............................................................444 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................473
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................445 Component Inspection...................................................473
Component Inspection...................................................446 Removal and Installation...............................................474
Removal and Installation...............................................446 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR.......475
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Description....................................................................475
(ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT).....................................447 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................475
Description....................................................................447 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................475
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................447 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................475
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................447 Wiring Diagram.............................................................477
Wiring Diagram.............................................................448 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................478
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................449 Component Inspection...................................................478
Component Inspection...................................................450 Removal and Installation...............................................479
Removal and Installation...............................................450 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)......480
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Description....................................................................480
SENSOR..................................................................451 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................480
Description....................................................................451 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................480
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check.................................................480
. 451 Wiring Diagram.............................................................481
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................483
EC-6
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ... 485 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................517
Description....................................................................485 Removal and Installation ..................................... 517. .A DTC
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................485 P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................485 SWITCH...................................................................519
EC
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................485 Description....................................................................519
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR........487 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Description....................................................................487 . 519
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................519
. 487 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 520 C
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................487 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................520
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................487 Wiring Diagram.............................................................521
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................487 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 522 D
Wiring Diagram.............................................................488 Component Inspection...................................................523
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................489 Removal and Installation...............................................523
Removal and Installation...............................................489 DTC P1606 ECM .................................................... 524 E
DTC P1216 EDU......................................................490 Description....................................................................524
Description....................................................................490 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................524
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................490 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................524
Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 524 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................491
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................491 DTC P1621 ECM RELAY........................................526
Wiring Diagram.............................................................492 ECM Terminals and Reference valve............................526
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................494 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 526 G
Removal and Installation...............................................496 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................526
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)......497 Wiring Diagram.............................................................527
Description....................................................................497 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 528 H
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection...................................................529
. 497 DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE..........................530
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................497 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................530
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................497 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 530
Overall Function Check.................................................498 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................530
Wiring Diagram.............................................................499 GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM...................................532
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................500 Description ........................................................... 532 J
Main 12 Causes of Overheating....................................506 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................532
Component Inspection...................................................507 Wiring Diagram.............................................................533
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL VALVE. 508 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 534 K
Description....................................................................508 Component Inspection...................................................538
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation...............................................538
. 508 EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 539
....................................................................................
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................508 L
Description....................................................................539
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................509
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................509
. 539
Wiring Diagram.............................................................510
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 540. .M Wiring
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................511
Diagram.........................................................................541
Component Inspection...................................................512
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................542
Removal and Installation...............................................512
Component Inspection...................................................544
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUST-
Removal and Installation...............................................545
MENT RESISTOR...................................................513
BRAKE SWITCH.....................................................546
Description....................................................................513
Description....................................................................546
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................513
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................546
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................513
Wiring Diagram.............................................................547
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................513
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................549
Wiring Diagram.............................................................514
Component Inspection...................................................550
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................515
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH.........551
Component Inspection...................................................516
Description....................................................................551
Removal and Installation...............................................516
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK.........................................517
. 551
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................517
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................551
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................517
EC-7
Wiring Diagram.............................................................552 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL..............................561
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................553 Wiring Diagram.............................................................561
START SIGNAL......................................................555 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR......................562
Wiring Diagram.............................................................555 Wiring Diagram (For South Africa)...............................562
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................556 Wiring Diagram (Except for South Africa)....................563
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH......557 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)....564
Component Description..................................................557 General Specifications...................................................564
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Mass Air Flow Sensor....................................................564
. 557 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor..............................564
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................557 Common Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor...............................564
Wiring Diagram.............................................................558 Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC).................................564
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................559 Camshaft Position Sensor..............................................564
Component Inspection....................................................560 Glow Plug......................................................................564
Removal and Installation................................................560 Egr Volume Control Valve............................................564
EC-8
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
A
Alphabetical Index EBS00FWM
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to EC
EC-95 .
Items DTC*1
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page C
CONSULT-II ECM*3
APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0227 0227 EC-161
EC-9
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
Items DTC*1
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*3
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-167
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-167
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
EC-95 .
DTC*1 Items
CONSULT-II 3 (CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
ECM*
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING EC-36
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*6 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-95
NO DTC IS
P0000 0000 DETECTED. FURTHER —
TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 EC-98
EC-10
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1 Items A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*3
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-109
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 EC-114 EC
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-114
EC-11
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1 Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*3
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-284
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-295
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-35
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-300
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-304
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: Models with three way catalyst
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
EC-12
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER" EBS00FWO
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a EC
front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
D
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. E
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tors. F
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MIL) to warn the driver G
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, H
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
I
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71, "HAR- J
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and L
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution EBS00FWQ
M
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
EC-13
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not disassemble ECM.
● If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will
return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a problem.
Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
EC-14
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function A
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com- EC
pleted.
D
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
SAT652J
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and E
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's F
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
M
SEF348N
PBIB0513E
EC-15
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
EC-16
PREPARATION
[QR]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools EBS00FWS
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number Tool name
Description EC
D
S-NT379
S-NT636
G
Commercial Service Tools EBS00FWT
PBIC0198E J
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure
L
S-NT653
S-NT705
EC-17
PREPARATION
[QR]
Tool name Description
Oxygen sensor Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
thread cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
ie: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
EC-18
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram (Models with Three Way Catalyst) EBS00FWU
EC
PBIB0906E
EC-19
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
System Diagram (Models without Three Way Catalyst) EBS00G7Z
PBIB0907E
EC-20
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00FWV
EC
PBIB0908E
Refer to EC-19 or EC-20 for Vacuum Control System.
EC-21
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
System Chart EBS00FWW
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: Models with three way catalyst.
*3: Models for Latin America and Mexico.
EC-22
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
*2: Models for Latin America and Mexico.
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the
valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The
program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine EC
speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor.
C
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- ing
conditions as listed below.
D
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
E
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” F
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration G
● During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)(MODELS WITH THREE H
WAY CATALYST)
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three
way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
L heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
PBIB0121E
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-125 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air- M
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops
in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from “N” to “D”
● When starting the engine
EC-23
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL (MODELS WITH THREE WAY CATALYST)
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical
mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig- inally designed. Both
manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector
clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then
computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes
short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The
signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical
value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it
is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the
short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over
time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the
engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same
width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
EC-24
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00FWY
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
G
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition H
signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g.,
N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the I
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up J
● At idle
● At low battery voltage K
SEF742M
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-
knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
L operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00FWZ M
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner Air conditioner relay
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure cut control
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under
the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
EC-25
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00FX0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800 rpm) fuel will
be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate
until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-22 .
Can communication (A/T models) EBS00G80
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- tiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- tronic control units
are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation
(not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN
L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but
selectively reads required data only.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC-26
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00FX2
IDLE SPEED
● Using CONSULT-II
EC
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
E
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
● Method A SEF058Y F
– Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
– Check ignition timing.
G
● Method B
J
– Remove No. 1 ignition coil. PBIB0515E
– Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-
tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.
PBIB0509E
PBIB0516E
EC-27
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
SEF166Y
– Check ignition timing.
DESCRIPTION
PBIB0514E
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel- erator pedal
by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EBS00FX3
DESCRIPTION
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric
throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00FX5
DESCRIPTION
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the spe- cific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
EC-28
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
EC-29
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
PREPARATION
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. A
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100C (158 - 212F) EC
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) C
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II F
1. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. H
SEF454Y
EC-30
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be car-
ried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by
referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed
and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 70050 rpm
A/T: 70050 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 155 BTDC
A/T: 155 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
SEF455Y
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned “ON”.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
PBIB0665E
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 70050 rpm
A/T: 70050 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 155 BTDC
A/T: 155 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the
EC-31
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
cause of the problem by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
EC-32
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: A
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
EC
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform EC-84, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . C
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
problem and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
D
– Engine stalls.
– Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check EBS00FX6 E
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
With CONSULT-II F
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II. G
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
H
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine. SEF214Y K
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
EC-33
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
PBIB0669E
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
PBIB0670E
● Fuel pump
EC-34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction EBS00FX7
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua- tors. The
ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data C
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
D
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
: Applicable —: Not applicable
E
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-II
F
ECM 1 — —
*
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in G
two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-43 .)
L light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving
pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, M
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only
the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For fail-safe items, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st
trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-34, "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as
specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-40 . Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce- dure” or
“Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Without CONSULT-II
EC-35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example:
0117, 0340 1065 etc.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II does not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc- tion is
displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was
driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. If a
1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem- perature,
short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data,
stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For details, see EC-72 .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st
trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze
frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip
detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set
of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- ory is
erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS- SION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF- DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
EC-36
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
A
EC
EC-37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00FXB
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-206 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
Engine stopped
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
“ON” position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich),
MONITOR*1 monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
EC-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I
(Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in
diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be
either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- tified codes can be identified by
using the CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the
SEF952W
number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an
ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral
appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no malfunction. (See
EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC- 37, "HOW
TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen
sensor 1.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
OFF Rich Closed loop system
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until engine
coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
EC-40
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MIL comes
ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
EC-41
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00FXC
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- trol,
EC
ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input
signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen- tial that
both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no problems such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with the engine.
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
SEF233G
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-40 . J
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus- tomer can
supply good information about such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the exam- ple
on EC-42 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This L
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically con-
trolled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
EC-42
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart
PBIB0912E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- form *3 If the on board diagnostic system can- not be
is other than “0” or “[1t]”, perform EC- EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR performed, check main power supply and
88, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . ground circuit. Refer to
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" EC-89, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
. ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, *5 EC-84
perform EC-88, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT" .
EC-43
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Description for Work Flow
A
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-41 .
EC
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st
trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-34 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame
data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Study the C
STEP II
relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom
Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-50 .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
D
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the
STEP III vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If E
the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the (1st trip)
DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
F
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode
and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The (1st trip) DTC G
cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
H
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-45 .) Then perform inspections according
to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-50 .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for I
mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to J
EC-61 , EC-79 .
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is
STEP VI also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-24, "How to
Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
K
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DENT" .
L
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is still
STEP VII detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one. M
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM. (Refer to
EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine
components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou- bleshooting
faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important
to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus- tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC
to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
EC-44
SEF907L
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
EC-95 .
EC-45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC-46
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0221 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0222 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees.
P1223 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1224
P0226 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0227 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0228 The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees.
P1227 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1228
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
ator engine stalls.
(ECM detect the throttle The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
valve is stuck open.) more.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
tion opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
P1126 opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
EC-47
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Basic Inspection EBS00FXF
1. INSPECTION START A
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance. EC
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
D
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
– Headlamp switch is OFF.
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.
– Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. SEF983U
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge. G
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
J
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no- load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. K
SEF976U
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. L
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
>> GO TO 3.
EC-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
SEF058Y
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 700 50 rpm
A/T: 700 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
EC-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Refer to EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP
EC
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT >> GO TO 7.
INCMP >> 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
C
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
E
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
>> GO TO 4.
EC-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 700 50 rpm
A/T: 700 50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
A
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
EC
M/T: 15 5 BTDC
A/T: 15 5 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG C
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 16.
D
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-44, "TIMING CHAIN" .
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
F
2. GO TO 4.
L
>> GO TO 4.
EC-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00FXG
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page
ENGINE STALL
EC-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page D
ENGINE STALL
E
EC-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page
ENGINE STALL
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
Connecting rod
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-68
Bearing
Crankshaft
EC-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page D
ENGINE STALL
E
EC-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00FXH
PBIB0921E
EC-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
PBIB0922E
EC-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB0486E
EC-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
PBIB0923E
EC-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB0924E
EC-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Circuit Diagram EBS00FXI
EC
TBWA0134E
EC-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TBWA0135E
EC-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00FXJ
EC
PREPARATION E
1. ECM
SEF970W is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove
glove box.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
F
L
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION: MEC486B M
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
2*1
P/L Heated oxygen sen- ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
sor 1 heater
PBIB0519E
EC-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
10*3 [Engine is running]
29*2 B/P Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
“ON”. (11 - 14V)
PBIB0520E
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0521E
21 BR Ignition signal No. 1
22 PU Ignition signal No. 2 0 - 0.2V
23 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
24 GY/R Ignition signal No. 4
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E
EC-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” 0 - 1.0V EC
(Compressor operates).
26 L Air conditioner relay
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A/C switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V) C
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
Cooling fan relay D
27 LG/B
(High) [Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running] E
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” Approximately 0V
(Compressor operates).
Air conditioner cut
30 PU/W [Engine is running]
signal F
● A/C switch is “ON” Approximately 4.6V
(Compressor not operates).
Approximately 2.6V
CAN communication G
33 W/B [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with the
line
communication status.
Approximately 2.4V
CAN communication H
34 L/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with the
line
communication status.
6 - 7V
I
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition J
● Idle speed
PBIB0523E
K
6 - 7V
36 L/OR Tachometer signal
[Engine is running]
L
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm
M
PBIB0524E
[Engine is running]
● Brake pedal fully released Approximately 0V
40 P Stop lamp switch
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
41 B/Y Start signal [Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V
EC-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
42 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “P” or “N”. Approximately 0V
A/T model
43 G/OR PNP switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”] (11 - 14V)
● Except the above gear position M/T model
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
● SET switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
● ASCD control is operating.
47 L ASCD SET lamp
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● ASCD control is not operating. (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
50 LG Data link connector ● CONSULT-II is disconnected. Approximately 5V
EC-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 3V
EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed
PBIB0527E
62*3
D
71*2 Crankshaft position Approximately 3V
PU/R sensor (POS)
E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
F
PBIB0528E
1.0 - 4.0V
G
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition H
● Idle speed
PBIB0525E
63*2
71* 3 I
Camshaft position 1.0 - 4.0V
PU/R sensor (PHASE)
[Engine is running] J
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
K
PBIB0526E
Approximately 2.3V
L
Accelerator pedal
64 OR/L position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
power supply
Sensor's power sup-
65 R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
ply
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
66 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
ECM (Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pres-
67 P
sure sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
EC-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V
● Idle speed
72 OR Mass air flow sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.6 - 2.0V
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “D” (A/T model)
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
80 B/P Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
82 W Knock sensor ● Idle speed Approximately 2.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
Refrigerant pressure
83 R/L sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”. 1.0 - 4.0V
(Compressor operates.)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air tempera-
84 Y/G [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake air
ture sensor
temperature.
Accelerator pedal
86 L position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
ground
EC-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
0.52 - 4.6V
Absolute pressure
88*4 SB [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with ambi- EC
sensor
ent barometric pressure.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● ASCD steering switch is “OFF”. Approximately 4V C
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● CRUISE switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
92* 1 G/W Heated oxygen sen- ● Warm-up condition 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodi- H
sor 1 cally change)
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tem- I
93 BR/Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
perature sensor
engine coolant temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) J
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition K
● Idle speed
PBIB0529E L
101 R/B Injector No. 1
102 Y/B Injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
103 G/B Injector No. 3 (11 - 14V)
104 L/B Injector No. 4 M
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0530E
EC-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
PBIB0532E
0 - 14V
0 - 14V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Models with three way catalyst
*2: Models with NATS
*3: Models without NATS
*4: Models for Latin America and Mexico
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications
Work support
on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be
Self-diagnostic results
read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
EC-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA DATA
Item WORK FREEZE MONI- MONI- ACTIVE
SUPPORT FRAME TOR TOR TEST
DTC*1
DATA*2 (SPEC)
Injectors
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition
signal)
Throttle control motor relay
Throttle control motor
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
OUT
PUT
noid valve
Air conditioner relay
Fuel pump relay
Cooling fan relay
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
VIAS control solenoid valve
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if
a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-34 .
4. Touch “START”.
PBIB0376E
PBR455D
EC-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
A
EC
D
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. SEF995X
E
EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-
CODE
9, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1 “MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) “MODE 4”:
Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
COOLANT TEMP [C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [F]
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
short-term fuel trim.
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [F]
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM A
MAI DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
N SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
EC
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the engine cuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature C
[C] or [F]
determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
● The signal voltage of heated oxygen D
HO2S1 (B1) [V]
sensor 1 is displayed.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 sig- nal ● After turning ON the ignition
during air-fuel ratio feedback control: switch, “RICH” is displayed until E
RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”, air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
and control is being affected toward a control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
[RICH/LEAN] LEAN ... means the mixture became F
clamped, the value just before the
“lean”, and control is being affected clamping is displayed continu-
toward a rich mixture. ously.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the G
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
H
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] ● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] signal voltage is displayed.
I
THRTL SEN 1 [V] ● The throttle position sensor signal volt-
THRTL SEN 2 [V] age is displayed.
EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM
MAI DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
N SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
width compensated by ECM according to certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
the input signals. cated.
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a
[BTDC] ECM according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V TIM ● Indicates [CA] of intake camshaft
(B1) [CA] advanced angle.
● The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (deter- mined
by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
ON ... intake valve timing control is oper-
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
● The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indi-
cated.
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF] ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
condition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the input
COOLING FAN signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM A
MAI DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
N SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
EC
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
C
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet. D
IDL A/V
LEARN CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
[YET/CMPLT/ already been performed successfully.
INCMP] INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
E
not been performed successfully.
ABSOL PRES/SE ● The signal voltage of absolute pressure
[V] sensor is displayed.
F
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2SEN HTR DTY
heater control value computed by the
[%]
ECM according to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
G
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE H
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph] I
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] CRUISE switch signal.
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN- J
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] ACCEL/RES switch signal. K
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] COAST/SET switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from L
BRAKE SW1 SW
ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD
[ON/OFF]
clutch switch signal (M/T models).
BRAKE SW2 SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop M
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT CUT ...Vehicle speed increased to
[NON/CUT] excessively high compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is
cut off.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
LO SPEED CUT CUT ...Vehicle speed decreased to
[NON/CUT] excessively low compared with the ASCD
set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM
MAI DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
N SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF]
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
SET LAMP
determined by the ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ones. They are the same figures as
DUTY-LOW width measured by the probe. an actual piece of data which was
PLS WIDTH-HI just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM
[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC1
[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC2
[OK/UNKWN
● Indicates the communication condition of ● These items are not displayed in
]
CAN communication line. “SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC3 mode.
[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC4
[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC5
[OK/UNKWN
]
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
Main A
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification EC
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification C
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the air-
cated. fuel ratio learning control.
D
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to the ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select
to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction SEF707X at the moment it is detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”
mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- nents and
harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/ 1st trip DTC will
be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an
Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur- ther
diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
EC-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE*2
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value M
EC-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW2*2 ● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
CRUISE switch is depressed at first
CRUISE LAMP*2 ● Ignition switch: ON ON OFF
time second time
● CRUISE switch: ON SET switch pressed ON
● When vehicle speed is between 40
km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
SET LAMP*2 MPH) (Except for Middle East)
● When vehicle speed is between 40 ASCD control is canceled OFF
km/h (25 MPH) and 160 km/h
(100 MPH) (For Middle East)
CAN COMM*3 OK
CAN CIRC 2* 3 OK
CAN CIRC 3* 3
● Ignition switch: ON UNKWN
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- tor
pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in “D” position (A/T models) or with shift lever in “1st”
position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after
“CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
EC-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
A
EC
PBIB0913E
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE [QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description EBS00FXO
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of
CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- TOR
(SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA
MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more
malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition EBS00FXP
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-45, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-85, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z
EC-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FXR
EC
SEF613ZD
EC-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE [QR]
SEF768Z
EC-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE [QR]
EC
SEF615ZA
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description EBS00FXS
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to
normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do
not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur- rences is poor electrical
connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit
checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific problem area.
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace.
EC-91
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00FXU
EC
TBWA0136E
EC-92
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FXV
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Counter current BATTERY VOLTAGE
12 G/W [Ignition switch “ON”]
return (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1.0V
● For 3 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
ECM relay
20 W/G [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Self shut-off)
● 3 seconds passed after turning ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
“OFF” (11 - 14V)
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0535E
EC-93
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M61, F41
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 EC
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
C
L
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0493E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SEF420X
EC-94
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
PBIB0536E
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 11.
EC-95
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
A
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
K
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and ECM relay terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
EC-96
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
13. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.
PBIB0077E
EC-97
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
Description EBS00G94
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- tiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- tronic control units EC
are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation
(not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN
L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
● ECM cannot communicate to other control E
U1000 CAN communication unit. ● Harness or connectors
1000 line ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the (CAN communication line is open or
specified time. shorted)
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G96
EC-98
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G97
TBWA0157E
EC-99
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G98
1. INSPECTION START A
EC-100
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
Description EBS00FY9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed and
engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
2 P/L
heater
PBIB0519E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-101
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FYC
A
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors EC
P0031 0031 Heated oxygen sensor 1 range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to open or shorted.)
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
heater.) C
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
P0032 0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is D
heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. H
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. I
WITHOUT CONSULT-II L
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y
M
3. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-101, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-102
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYE
TBWA0060E
EC-103
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYF
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. PBIB0541E J
● Harness connectors E60, F36
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
L
>> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-104
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
PBIB0542E
EC-105
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description EBS00FYI
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea- sures
the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It EC
consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM.
The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount.
The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the
intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. C
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the
temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
TER-
WIRE J
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V K
● Idle speed
72 OR Mass air flow sensor [Engine is running]
L
● Warm-up condition 1.6 - 2.0V
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
[Engine is running] M
80 B/P Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
EC-106
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-106, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-107
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-106, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYN
A
EC
TBWA0055E
EC-108
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYO
1. INSPECTION START
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0925E
EC-109
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1. Disconnect MAF sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC
Terminal Voltage
F
2 Approximately 5V
4 Battery voltage
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 72. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-110
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-108, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.5
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to nor-
1.6 - 2.0
mal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.5 - 2.0 to Approx. 4.0
*: Check for liner voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000
rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
PBIB0537E
● Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation EBS00FYQ
EC-111
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description EBS00FYR
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The
sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. EC
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
E
<Reference data>
Intake air F
Voltage* V Resistance k SEC266C
temperature C (F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 84 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the I
ground.
EBS00FYS
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
EBS00G82
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-112, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF058Y
EC-112
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-113
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYU
EC
TBWA0056E
EC-114
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYV
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0066E
2. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-115
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FYW
SEC266C
EC-116
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input.
The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the ther- mistor decreases as temperature
increases.
<Reference data>
SEF594K
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance k
temperature C (F)
10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 93 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FYZ
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch “ON” or
“START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40C (104F)
Engine coolant temper- More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80C (176F)
ature sensor circuit Start
40 - 80C (104 - 176F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine
is running.
EC-117
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZ0
A
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds. G
2. Turn ignition switch OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.SEF058Y
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H
EC-118
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZ1
TBWA0057E
EC-119
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZ2
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. H
I
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0080E J
2. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
EC-120
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FZ3
<Reference data>
EC-121
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00FZ5
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects
the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The EC
heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia.
The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions
to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-
fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D
SEF463R
F
EC-122
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZ8
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy- gen
sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
SEF301UA
● Harness or connectors
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0132 circuit high voltage sent to ECM. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-122, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF174Y
EC-123
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZA
EC
TBWA0059E
EC-124
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZB
>> GO TO 2.
EC-125
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FZC
F
6. Check the following.
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes SEF646Y G
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
H
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
I
SEF217YA
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF648Y
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 92 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
EC-126
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- stant
under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
EC-127
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
DTC P0134 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00FZE
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects
the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The EC
heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia.
The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions
to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-
fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D
SEF463R
F
EC-128
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZH
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is not
input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V.
Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to
400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not
inordinately long.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
SEF237U
● Harness or connectors
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range between
0.2 to 0.4V.
5. If NG, go to EC-128, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 92 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
SEF646Y
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- stant
under no load.
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
PBIB0543E
EC-129
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZJ
EC
TBWA0059E
EC-130
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZK
1. INSPECTION START
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-131
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
6. Check the following.
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
SEF646Y
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
I
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
L
SEF217YA
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF648Y
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 92 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
EC-132
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- stant
under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
EC-133
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZN
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical
mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The ECM calculates the EC
necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges
the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
● Intake air leaks
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Injectors F
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
● Exhaust gas leaks
P0171 ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
0171 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
Fuel injection system too lean large.
● Lack of fuel G
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
● Mass air flow sensor
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZO
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at I
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSUTL-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- SULT-
II.
K
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. L
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go
to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check
exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF215Z
EC-134
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and
run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- nector.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
“ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer
to EC-37 .
Make sure DTC 0102 is detected.
7. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”
memory. Refer to EC-37 .
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
9. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer to EC-37 .
The 1st trip DTC 0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-134, "Diag- nostic
PBIB0495E
Procedure" .
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-135
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZP
EC
TBWA0063E
EC-136
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZQ
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-137
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
A
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
EC
1.1 - 1.5V: at idling
1.6 - 2.0V: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine
grounds. Refer to EC-103, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. J
2. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. MEC703B
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-336 .
EC-138
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out
from injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.
EC-139
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZR
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical
mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The ECM calculates the EC
necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges
the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors
P0172 Fuel injection system too rich ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks F
0172 large.
● Incorrect fuel pressure
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
● Mass air flow sensor
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at H
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- SULT-
II. J
4.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. K
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
7.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system L
has a malfunction, too.
8.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine M
does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SEF215Z
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC-140
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and
run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- nector.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
“ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer
to EC-37 .
Make sure DTC 0102 is detected.
7. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”
memory. Refer to EC-37 .
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
9. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer to EC-37 .
The 1st trip DTC 0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-140, "Diag- nostic
PBIB0495E
Procedure" .
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-141
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZT
EC
TBWA0063E
EC-142
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZU
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK SEF099P
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-143
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
A
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
EC
1.1 - 1.5V: at idling
1.6 - 2.0V: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine
grounds. Refer to EC-103, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
J
2. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
MEC703B
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-336 .
EC-144
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
EC-145
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00FZV
CAUTION:
I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] K
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
L
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “D” (A/T model)
M
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) More than 0.36V
EC-146
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZX
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0221 circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and shorted.)
0221 problem TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-147
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G84
EC
TBWA0182E
EC-148
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00BGN
>> GO TO 2.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0082E
2. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-149
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal
74 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-4.
3. Check the following. F
EC-150
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 73 (TP sensor 1), 74 (TP
sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
EC-151
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00GO0
CAUTION:
I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] K
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
L
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “D” (A/T model)
M
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) More than 0.36V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is ● Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is
● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 circuit high input sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 1)
EC-152
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-153
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G85
EC
TBWA0178E
EC-154
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G08
>> GO TO 2.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0082E
2. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-155
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
2. Disconnect joint connector-4.
3. Check the following.
F
– Continuity between joint connector-4 terminal 1 and engine ground
– Joint connector-4
(Refer to PG-28, "Harness Layout" .)
G
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC-156
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 73 (TP sensor 1), 74 (TP
sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
EC-157
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G0B
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the
accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- tor position EC
and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00BGR
F
PBIB0146E
Specification data are reference values.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. J
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. K
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR L
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed M
Accelerator pedal position
64 OR/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
sensor 2 power supply
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.41 - 0.71V
Accelerator pedal position
75 R/L
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.67V
EC-158
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G0D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0226 sensor circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 shorted.)
0226 mance problem and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-159
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G86
EC
TBWA0185E
EC-160
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00BGW
>> GO TO 2.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-161
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1, 3 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 75 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 76 and APP sensor
terminal 2.
I
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-162
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
EC-163
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G0J
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the
accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- tor position EC
and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GOU
F
PBIB0146E
Specification data are reference values.
I
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) K
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V L
● Idle speed
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”] M
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.41 - 0.71V
Accelerator pedal position
75 R/L
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
More than 3.9V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
0227 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
0228 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
EC-164
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-165
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G87
EC
TBWA0152E
EC-166
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G0O
>> GO TO 2.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-167
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 75 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-168
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
EC-169
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
A
Component Description EBS00G0R
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking
vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and EC
sent to the ECM.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
PBIB0512E
CAUTION:
G
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- H
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
82 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V I
● Idle speed
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
Name
K
P0327 Knock sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0327 low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent
● Knock sensor L
0328 high input to ECM.
NOTE: M
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC-170
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-170, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-171
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G0V
EC
TBWA0064E
EC-172
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G0W
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 82 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20C (68F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity
PBIB0512E should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-173
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
4. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
A
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
>> GO TO 5. EC
F
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00G0X
KNOCK SENSOR G
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more H
than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20C
I
(68F)] CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
J
EC-174
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder block rear
housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at the end of the
crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev- olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the
gap with the sensor change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the
engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G10
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 3V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0527E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0528E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Models without NVIS
*2: Models with NVIS
EC-175
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G12
A
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is
not detected by the ECM during the first EC
few seconds of engine cranking.
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft ● Harness or connectors
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) C
0335 sensor (POS) circuit
while the engine is running.
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is
● Signal plate
not in the normal pattern during engine running.
D
NOTE: E
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: F
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- H
onds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. I
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
K
1. Crank engine at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. SEF058Y
EC-176
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G14
TBWA0140E
EC-177
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G15
>> GO TO 2.
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-178
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
4. CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (Models without NATS), 71 (Models with NATS) and CKP
sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-179
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G16
PBIB0563E E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
EC-180
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with intake
valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The crankshaft position
sensor (POS) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper- ative, the
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con- trols of engine
parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap
with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G19
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: PBIB0562E
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. A
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0526E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Models with NVIS
*2: Models without NVIS
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
EC-181
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
● Harness or connectors
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor ● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM ● Camshaft (Intake)
0340 (PHASE) circuit during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-21 .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-21 .)
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
EC-182
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G1B
A
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II C
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
D
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-181, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds. F
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-181, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
G
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. SEF058Y H
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. I
5. Start engine and maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
7. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. J
EC-183
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1C
TBWA0141E
EC-184
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1D
>> GO TO 3.
F
PBIB0664E
EC-185
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (Models with NATS), 71 (Models without NATS) and CMP
sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB0565E
EC-186
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
2 (+) - 3 (-)
I
J
Removal and Installation EBS00G1F
EC-187
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
PBIB0509E
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. A
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
The ignition signal in the primary circuit is ● Condenser
P0350 Ignition coil primary/ not sent to ECM during engine cranking or
0350 secondary circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
running.
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
EC-188
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS005U5
A
NOTE:
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
● If DTC P0350 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335 or EC
P0340 first. Refer to EC-172 or EC-178 .
WITH CONSULT-II
C
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to D
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-188, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. E
G
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 5 seconds.)
H
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.SEF058Y
EC-189
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1K
TBWA0148E
EC-190
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
EC
TBWA0179E
EC-191
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1L
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed
drop.
>> GO TO 11.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground with CON- PBIB0580E
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0136E
EC-192
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM relay. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and ECM relay
terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. E
● 20A fuse
● Harness or connectors E61, F38 K
● Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
L
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-193
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
9. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC-194
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 24 and ignition coil terminal 3. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
15. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" .
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
J
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
SEF371Q
EC-195
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 M at 25C (77F)
EC-196
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
A
Component Description EBS00G1O
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS
actuator and electric unit (2WD models). The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G1P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
C
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
D
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
E
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running] F
63*1 ● Lift up the vehicle
81*2 L/B Vehicle speed sensor
● Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25MPH)
G
PBIB0531E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Models without NATS H
*2: Models with NATS
I
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted) J
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Wheel sensor
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor combination meter is sent to ECM even
● 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models)
0500 when vehicle is being driven. K
● ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models)
● Combination meter
EC-197
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should exceed 10
km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If
NG, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Lift up the vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed with combination meter.
The vehicle speed indication should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suit- able gear
position.
4. If NG, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-198
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1T
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0142E
EC-199
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0143E
EC-200
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1U
1. CHECK DTC WITH 4WD/ABS CONTROL UNIT, ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTIRC UNIT
A
Check DTC with 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models). Refer
to BRC-32 or BRC-7 . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. C
EC-201
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
● Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure
67 P
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. ● Power steering pressure sensor
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
EC-202
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
EC
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
EC-203
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G20
TBWA0150E
EC-204
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G21
>> GO TO 2.
C
M
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SEF509Y
2. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-205
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned fully. Approximately 3.6V
Steering wheel is not being turned. Approximately 0.6V
PBIB0570E
EC-206
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description EBS00G23
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and
output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition SEF093X Possible cause
F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
0605 Engine control module ● ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected. H
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform J
“PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
NOTE: K
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A L
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
M
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-205, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-207
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
“ON”.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-205, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-208
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G26
1. INSPECTION START A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. C
See EC-203 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC E
( Without CONSULT-II)" .
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-203 . F
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. G
No >> INSPECTION END
2. REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS (Nissan
Anti-theft System)" .
I
3. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
EC-209
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
DTC P0650 MIL PFP:24810
Malfunction Indicator (MIL) is located on the instrument panel. When the ignition switch is turned ON without engine
running, MIL will light up. This is a bulb check. When the engine is started, MIL should go off. If MIL remains on, the
on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G28
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● An excessively high voltage is sent to ECM
through the MIL circuit under the condition
that calls for MIL light up. ● Harness or connectors
P0650 Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL circuit is open or shorted.)
0650 (MIL) control circuit ● An excessively low voltage is sent to ECM
through the MIL circuit under the condition ● MIL
that calls for MIL not to light up.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when both DTC P0650 and another DTC, which calls for MIL to light up, are detected
at the same time.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the MIL circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
SEF058Y
confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check that the MIL is illuminated.
3. If NG, go to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If
OK, go to next step.
4. Start engine.
5. Check that the MIL is not illuminated.
6. If NG, go to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-210
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G2A
EC
TBWA0189E
EC-211
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G2B
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-212
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
5. CHECK COMBINATION METER
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Check continuity under the following conditions. EC
PBIB0572E
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-20, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" (LHD
models), DI-37, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" (RHD models).
EC-213
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is
turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air
fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol- ume
learning value memory, etc.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
SEF093X
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
66 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
ECM (Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1065 ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
1065 ECM power supply circuit properly. open or shorted.]
● ECM
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
“ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-213, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSUT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. SEF058Y
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
EC-214
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. A
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-213, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
EC-215
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G2F
TBWA0129E
EC-216
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G2G
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. L
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
M
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-210 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC (
Without CONSULT-II)" .
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-210 .
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END
EC-217
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
3. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC-218
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description EBS00G7T
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake J
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature.
Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving
status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
K increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
PBIB0540E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-219
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
PBIB0532E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P1110 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P1111”. See
EC-219 .
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
EC-220
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check EBS00G8C
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the intake valve timing control system. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
EC
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 107 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground.
D
5. Start engine and let it idle.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
E
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
BATTERY VOLTAGE F
At idle
(11 - 14V)
PBIB0532E
PBIB0678E I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
7. If NG, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G7Y
J
EC-221
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
EC-222
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
A
Component Description EBS00B7P
TER-
WIRE J
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE K
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V - BATTERY
L
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
PBIB0532E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1111 Intake valve timing control An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid
1111 solenoid valve circuit through intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC-223
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00B7T
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-224
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8D
EC
TBWA0070E
EC-225
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00B7V
PBIB0511E
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
Check the harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay.
PBIB0285E
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 107 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi- nal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-227
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC-228
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR [QR]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Description EBS00G2V
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt- tle valve
and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these
signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to
driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G2W
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not
P1121 Electric throttle control B)
in specified range. ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and MIL lights
up.
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
NOTE:
● Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be con-
firmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B”, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
“ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
EC-229
SEF058Y
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR [QR]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. A
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T models), “1st” position (M/T models) and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. EC
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. D
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position. E
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
H
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T models), “1st” position (M/T models)
SEF058Y and wait at least 2 seconds.
EC-230
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description EBS00G2Z
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-224 or EC-233 .
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- back to
the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving
condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G8E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
112 W/R Throttle control motor (11 - 14V)
relay [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
113 W/B [Ignition switch “ON”]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
PBIB0533E
Throttle control motor [Engine is running]
115 B/Y ground ● Idle speed Approximately 0V
0 - 14V
PBIB0534E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-231
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
EC-232
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. C
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
K
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. L
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-233
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8F
TBWA0180E
EC-234
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G33
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 115 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector.
PBIB0575E
EC-235
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 112 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-236
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
114 Should exist D
6 116 Should not exist
114 Should not exist
3 E
116 Should exist
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG PBIB0497E
OK >> GO TO 10. F
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. M
EC-237
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION [QR]
13. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-238
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00G36
Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON EC
signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G37
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- F
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- G
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”] H
112 W/R Throttle control motor (11 - 14V)
relay [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
113 W/B
relay power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
I
J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is stuck (Throttle control motor relay circuit is K
1124 relay circuit short ON. shorted)
● Throttle control motor relay
ECM detects a voltage of power source for throt- tle ● Harness or connectors L
P1126 Throttle control motor control motor is excessively low. (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection open)
logic. ● Throttle control motor relay
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the DTC P1124 is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode) and the MIL lights up.
When the DTC P1126 is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-239
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-240
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8I
EC
TBWA0153E
EC-241
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G8J
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-242
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 112 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC
● Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00G8K
PBIB0098E
EC-243
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- back to
the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving
condition.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GP0
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. A
0 - 14V
PBIB0533E
Throttle control motor [Engine is running]
115 B/Y ground ● Idle speed Approximately 0V
0 - 14V
PBIB0534E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short both circuits between ECM and (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
EC-244
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC-245
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds. A
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-241, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. F
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-241, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
G
EC-246
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8L
TBWA0186E
EC-247
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G3G
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 115 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. K
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-248
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-249
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
System Description EBS00G3J
EC-250
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G3L
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
Cooling fan relay
27 LG/B
(High) [Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● Cooling fan does not operate properly ● Radiator hose
(Overheat).
● Radiator
P1217 Engine over temperature ● Cooling fan system does not operate
● Radiator cap
1217 (Overheat) properly (Overheat).
● Water pump
● Engine coolant was not added to the
system using the proper filling method. ● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-255, "Main 12
Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-19, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00G3N
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con- firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
EC-251
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. A
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the
proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-248, "Diagnostic
EC
Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled
the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
C
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
D
H
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. SEF646X I
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer J
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine. K
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position.
5. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. L
6. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating. SEF621W
SEC163BA
EC-252
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher
speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
14. If NG, go to EC-248, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MEC475B
EC-253
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G3O
EC
TBWA0144E
EC-254
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G3P
1. INSPECTION START
SEF784Z
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than
low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC- 253,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF785Z
EC-255
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
EC
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. C
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
MEC475B
EC-256
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure
drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check the following for leak
● Hose
● Radiator
8. CHECK THERMOSTAT
EC-257
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
A
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-255, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C
H
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
PBIB0577E I
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
● 40A fusible links J
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-258
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 37 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer
to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-259
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
A
Refer to EC-256, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
J
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
EC-260
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 2.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-261
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
A
Refer to EC-256, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
E
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser F
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-14, "Engine G
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See MA-15, "Changing
in reservoir tank and radi- Engine Coolant" . H
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-13, "Checking
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap" . I
kg/cm , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)
2
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-21, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT AND WATER CON-
TROL VALVE" , and CO- K
12, "RADIATOR" .
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-9, "LEVEL
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank CHECK" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-53, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-53, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston HEAD" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-5, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
EC-262
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G3R
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No current supply No
Terminals
Speed (+) ()
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor High 1, 2 3, 4
SEF734W
EC-263
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00G3S
CAUTION:
I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] K
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
L
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “D” (A/T model)
M
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) Less than 4.75V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1223 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is ● Harness or connectors
1223 circuit low input sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1224 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is
● Electric throttle control actuator
1224 circuit high input sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 2)
EC-264
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-260, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-265
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G88
EC
TBWA0181E
EC-266
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00GP2
>> GO TO 2.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0082E
2. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-267
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
2. Disconnect joint connector-4.
3. Check the following.
F
– Continuity between joint connector-4 terminal 1 and engine ground
– Joint connector-4
(Refer to PG-28, "Harness Layout" .)
G
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC-268
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 73 (TP sensor 1), 74 (TP
sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
EC-269
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00G40
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P1225 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 performance problem excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
H
seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
J
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" K
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-270
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G43
EC-271
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00G45
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P1226 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 performance problem performed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G47
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 H
seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times. K
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
L
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-272
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G48
EC-273
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G4A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the
accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- tor position EC
and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GP5
F
PBIB0146E
Specification data are reference values.
I
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) K
COLOR
L NO.
Accelerator pedal position
64 OR/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
sensor 2 power supply
L
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.08 - 0.48V
Accelerator pedal position
76 W/B
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] M
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 1.71V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
1227 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
1228 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EC-274
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-275
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G89
EC
TBWA0184E
EC-276
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4F
>> GO TO 2.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-277
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
EC-278
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
EC-279
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G4I
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at K
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-275, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-280
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00BGM
TBWA0183E
EC-281
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4L
>> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0082E
EC-282
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
EC-283
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description EBS00G4M
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each
button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which EC
button is operated.
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
C
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. J
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. K
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR L
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
M
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● ASCD steering switch is “OFF”. Approximately 4V
EC-284
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G4O
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-203, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
● Harness or connectors
● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
P1564 (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch steering switch is out of the specified
1564 ● ASCD steering switch
range.
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
wait at least 10 seconds.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-281, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II SEF058Y
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
8. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-281, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-285
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8S
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0162E
EC-286
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0163E
EC-287
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4R
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CAN-
CEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
C
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 89 and ground with press- H
ing each button.
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector and ECM
harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch termi- nal 5
(LHD models), 2 (RHD models) and ECM terminal 58. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-288 PBIB0916E
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
CAUTION: G
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at H
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: I
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine. J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
K
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
L
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. M
EC-289
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
EC-290
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8T
EC
TBWA0164E
EC-291
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4Y
M/T models
CONDITION INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON
M/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. PBIB0855E
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
EC-292
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 40 and ground under the fol-
SEC013D
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
PBIB0856E
NG >> GO TO 13. J
EC-293
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is released Battery voltage
When clutch pedal is depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-294
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
K
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC009D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
NG >> GO TO 9.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-295
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT -II or tester.
PBIB0498E
PBIB0117E
EC-296
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
● 15A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
Continuity should exist.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
EC-297
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
Condition Continuity
When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
PBIB0118E
EC-298
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
Component Description EBS00G50
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals, and detects vehicle speed for ASCD control. Vehicle speed sig- nals are
input from combination meter and TCM separately. Signal from TCM is sent via CAN communication line. Refer to EC
EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G51
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000.
Refer to EC-95, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. D
Refer to EC-193, "DTC P0500 VSS"
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause E
● Harness or connectors
(The combination meter circuit is open or
shorted.)
F
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
ECM detects a difference between two shorted.)
P1574
ASCD vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed signals is out of the G
1574 ● Combination meter
specified range.
● Wheel sensor
● TCM
H
● ECM
CAUTION: I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at J
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test K
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. L
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH) for at least 5
seconds. M
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-298, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH) for at least 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-298, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-299
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8U
LHD MODELS
TBWA0166E
EC-300
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
RHD MODELS
A
EC
TBWA0167E
EC-301
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G8V
1. INSPECTION START
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-33, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
3. CHECK DTC WITH 4WD/ABS CONTROL UNIT, ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTIRC UNIT
Check DTC with 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models). Refer
to BRC-32 or BRC-7 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
EC-302
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M62, F42
● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter EC
EC-303
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is “ON”. ECM
detects the position because the continuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G55
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
● Gear position is “P” or “N”.
A/T model
43 G/OR PNP switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
● Except the above gear position M/T model
Approximately 5V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1706 Park/neutral position The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
1706 switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and circuit is open or shorted.]
driving. ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-304
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow- A
ing conditions.
PBIB0578E
EC-305
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5A
TBWA0072E
EC-306
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5B
EC-307
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Description EBS00G5C
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal
is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G5D
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Brake pedal fully released Approximately 0V
40 P Stop lamp switch
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
1805 Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. shorted.)
● Stop lamp switch
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC (
Without CONSULT-II)" .
EC-308
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. A
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
EC-309
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5H
TBWA0151E
EC-310
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5I
I
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0498E
Voltage: Battery voltage J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. K
● 15A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-311
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB0498E
EC-312
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. A
Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
EC
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
3. If NG, replace stop lamp switch.
C
PBIB0118E
E
EC-313
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
SEF052V
PBIB0629E
EC-314
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8X
EC
TBWA0160E
EC-315
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5M
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0948E
EC-316
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
D
E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. PBIB0079E F
● Harness connector M61, F41
● Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
8. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC-317
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below 93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg)
or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
4. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor.
PBIB0919E
EC-318
HO2S1
[QR]
HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00G5O
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects
the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The EC
heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia.
The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions
to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-
fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D
SEF463R
F
EC-319
HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5R
TBWA0074E
EC-320
HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5S
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
C
sure that the monitors fluctuate between LEAN and RICH more
than five times in 10 seconds.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SEF820Y
G
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Set ECM in “Diagnostic test mode - II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor)”.
Refer to EC-38, "DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR" . H
4. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure
that the MIL comes ON more than five times in 10 seconds.
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
J
2. INSPECTION START L
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SAT652J
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
M
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0925E
EC-321
HO2S1
[QR]
3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-322
HO2S1
[QR]
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- A
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
EC
D
6. Check the following.
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes SEF646Y
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. E
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
SEF217YA
K
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. L
SEF648Y
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II M
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 92 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- stant
under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
EC-324
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
A
Description EBS00G5V
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
C
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol- D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1*
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF
duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is I
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the
greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
J
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-325
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
Approximately 10V
PBIB0520E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-326
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5Y
EC
TBWA0079E
EC-327
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5Z
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0676E
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canis- ter.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the
following conditions.
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-328
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
A
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to
EC-381, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
C
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. D
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. E
H
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB0944E
EC-329
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. OK
(Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve
opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-330
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G60
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions. PBIB0149E
F
EC-331
VIAS
[QR]
VIAS PFP:14956
Description EBS00G62
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Ignition switch Start signal
VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
PBIB0843E
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective
suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port including the intake
valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suc- tion efficiency and higher
torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the
VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and
therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided indepen- dently for
each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction resistance under high
speeds.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control sys- tem. It
is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve
actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in
the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.
EC-332
VIAS
PBIB0946E [QR]
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum A
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the
ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the EC
plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve
actuator.
C
E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION PBIB0947E SPECIFICATION
Idle OFF
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up More than 5,000 rpm ON
F
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GP9
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
G
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
H
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
I
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
VIAS control solenoid
25 GY/L
valve [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V J
● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
EC-333
VIAS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G99
TBWA0159E
EC-334
VIAS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G65
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
C
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make F
sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
PBIB0844E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
PBIB0949E
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power
valve actuator rod moves.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
PBIB0949E
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. NG
(Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
EC-335
VIAS
[QR]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check
vacuum existence under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
PBIB0844E
NG >> GO TO 4.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Vacuum
12V direct current supply Should exist.
No supply Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF109L
EC-336
VIAS
[QR]
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
A
Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
NG >> Replace vacuum tank.
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC-337
VIAS
[QR]
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol- lowing
PBIB0177E
conditions.
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum pump. MEC488B
EC-338
VIAS
[QR]
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B .
A
EC
EC-339
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel
to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel
injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the
length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection
pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0530E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-340
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6B
EC
TBWA0082E
EC-341
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6C
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB0133E
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
MEC703B
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-342
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0510E
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
EC-343
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK INJECTOR
INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5 [at 20C (68F)]
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . PBIB0181E
EC-344
START SIGNAL
[QR]
START SIGNAL PFP:48750
A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G6F
TER-
WIRE E
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
41 B/Y Start signal F
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V
EC-345
START SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6H
TBWA0085E
EC-346
START SIGNAL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6I
1. INSPECTION START
A
With CONSULT-II
D
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions. E
H
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II PBIB0182E
Check voltage between ECM terminal 41 and ground under the fol- I
lowing conditions.
Condition Voltage J
Ignition switch “START” Battery voltage
Other positions Approximately 0V
OK or NG K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
5. CHECK FUSE
EC-347
START SIGNAL
[QR]
6. CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 41 and fuse block (J/B), ignition switch and fuse block (J/B).
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-348
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
A
Description EBS00G6J
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Ignition switch Start signal
C
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startability. If
the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam- D
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and
prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the
ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. H
K
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor EBS00G6K
Mode
PBIB0513E L
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
● Engine running or cranking ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY
● Except above conditions OFF
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-349
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
10*1 [Engine is running]
29*2 B/P Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”. (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Models without NATS
*2: Models with NATS
EC-350
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6M
EC
TBWA0149E
EC-351
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6N
EC-352
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
4. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1, condenser termi- nal 2 and EC
body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Harness connectors B22, B128 (RHD models) F
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and condenser
● Harness for open or short between condenser and body ground
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK CONDENSER
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-353
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2
No current supply No
EC-354
PBIB0098E
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. A
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 3 and 5.
EC
Resistance: Approximately 1.0 [at 25C (77F)]
CONDENSER E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. PBIB0658E
I
Removal and Installation EBS00G6P
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUELSEF124Y
PUMP ASSEMBLY" . J
EC-355
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air
conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure
transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is
sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB0945E
SEF099X
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GPC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
(Compressor operates.)
EC-356
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6S
EC
TBWA0088E
EC-357
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6T
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-358
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
EC-359
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
Electrical load signal ● Rear window defogger switch is “ON” (11 - 14V)
52 R/W (Rear window defogger
signal) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Rear window defogger switch is “OFF” Approximately 0V
EC-360
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00GB3
EC
TBWA0154E
EC-361
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
TBWA0155E
EC-362
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
EC
TBWA0156E
EC-363
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00GB4
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions.
EC-364 PBIB0103E
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition Voltage C
Rear window defogger switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE
Rear window defogger switch “OFF” 0V
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 8.
E
Condition Voltage H
Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position BATTERY VOLTAGE
Lighting switch “OFF” 0V
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 12.
J
Condition Voltage M
Heater fan control switch “ON” 0V
heater fan control switch “OFF” Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 18.
EC-365
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
9. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminal 5. Refer to
wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK (Models without xenon headlamp)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Models with xenon headlamp)>>GO TO 15.
NG >> Refer to LT-4, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-10, "HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE - "
.
EC-366
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
13. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 53 and lighting switch terminal 9, 10 under the following
conditions.
LHD models and for South Africa C
PBIB0662E
Condition Continuity
K
PBIB0920E 1 Should exist
2 Should not exist
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 14. M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-367
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
15. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect HID relay LH.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and HID relay LH terminal 3. Refer
to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the fan control switch.
3. Check the blower fan motor. Does the blower fan motor activate? Yes
or No
Yes (Models with auto A/C)>>GO TO 19. Yes
(Models with manual A/C)>>GO TO 21.
No >> Refer to ATC-32, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (Automatic air conditioner models), or MTC-30,
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (Manual air conditioner models).
EC-368
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
20. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors M61, F41 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M62, F42 (RHD models) EC
● Harness for open and short between ECM and A/C AUTO AMP.
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-369
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and
stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by
this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
40 P Stop lamp switch
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
56 GY/L ASCD brake switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Brake pedal is fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
EC-370
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8Z
EC
TBWA0165E
EC-371
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G72
M/T models
CONDITION INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON
M/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. PBIB0855E
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
EC-372
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 40 and ground under the fol-
SEC013D
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
I
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
PBIB0856E
NG >> GO TO 13. J
EC-373
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is released Battery voltage
When clutch pedal is depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-374
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
K
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC009D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
NG >> GO TO 9.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-375
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT -II or tester.
PBIB0498E
PBIB0117E
EC-376
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
● 10A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
Continuity should exist.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
EC-377
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and
is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set- ting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G90
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
39 G/Y ASCD CRUISE lamp ● CRUISE switch is depressed at first time sec- ond
time BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● SET switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
● ASCD control is operating.
47 L ASCD SET lamp
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● ASCD control is not operating. (11 - 14V)
EC-378
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G92
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0168E
EC-379
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0169E
EC-380
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G93
2. CHECK ASCD INDICATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors
EC-381
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
4. CHECK COMBINATION METER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NGPBIB0917E
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" (LH, DI- 21,
"COMBINATION METERS (RHD MODELS)" .
EC-382
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[QR]
DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00G77
EC
TBWA0158E
EC-383
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description EBS00G78
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0491E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This
reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is
stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is
operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the
flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the
air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling.
EC-384
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
PBIB0909E
EC-385
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G79
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B . Orally blow air through port A .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
2. Block port A . Orally blow air through port B .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF552Y
EC-386
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description EBS00G7A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti- lating air. The
ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
I
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the
reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not J
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through
the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
M
Component Inspection EBS00G7B
SEC137A
EC-387
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC-388
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
A
System Description EBS00G7C
I
tor in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the J
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then
ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION K
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is depressed
L
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
● A/T selector lever is shifted to P or N position (A/T models)
M If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is
released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet
following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released.
● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position (A/T models)
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) (Except for Middle East)
EC-389
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 160 km/h (100 MPH) (For Middle East)
Component Description EBS00G7D
EC-390
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure EBS00G7E
Fuel pressure at idle kPa (bar, kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.5, 3.7, 51)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00G7F
Injector EBS00G7P
EC-391
INDEX FOR DTC
[YD]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
EC-392
INDEX FOR DTC
[YD]
Items
DTC MIL illumination Reference page A
(CONSULT-II screen item)
P0203 CYL3 INJECTOR EC-463
P0204 CYL4 INJECTOR EC-463
EC
P0335 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) EC-470
P0340 CAM POS SEN/CIR EC-475
P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SEN EC-480 C
P1107 ECM 10 EC-485
P1180 P9·FUEL TEMP SEN EC-487
D
P1216 INJ DRIVE UNIT EC-490
P1217 OVER HEAT EC-497
P1233 SUCTION CONT/V1 EC-508 E
P1234 SUCTION CONT/V2 EC-508
P1301 INJ1 CORREC R — EC-513
P1302 INJ2 CORREC R — EC-513 F
P1303 INJ3 CORREC R — EC-513
P1304 INJ4 CORREC R — EC-513
G
P1305 FUEL LEAK FNCTN EC-517
P1510 ACCEL POS SW (F/C) EC-519
P1606 ECM 1 EC-524 H
P1610 - P1617 NATS MALFUNTION — BL-137
P1621 ECM 15 — EC-526
I
P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE EC-530
EC-393
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER" EBS00DB6
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a
front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service
Manual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness
connec- tors.
Precautions EBS00DB7
SEF289H
SEF291H
EC-394
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
A
● Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-420 .
EC
SEF348N
EC-395
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when staring.
● Immediately after staring, do not rev up engine
unnecessar- ily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
EC-396
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram EBS00DB9
EC
PBIB0901E
EC-397
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
System Chart EBS00DBA
● Common rail fuel pressure sensor EDU, Fuel injectors and Suction control
Fuel injection timing control
valve
● Fuel temperature sensor
EDU, Fuel injectors and Suction control
● Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel cut control
valve
● Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
Glow control system Glow relay & glow indictor lamp
● Camshaft position sensor
On board diagnostic system Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
● Vehicle speed sensor
EGR volume control EGR volume control valve
● Ignition switch
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
● Stop Lamp switch
● Air conditioner switch
● Mass air flow sensor
● Park/neutral position switch Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
● Battery voltage
● Power steering oil pressure switch
Fuel Injection Control System EBS00DBB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Three types of fuel injection control are provided to accommodate engine operating conditions; normal control, idle
control and start control. The ECM determines the appropriate fuel injection control. Under each control, the amount of
fuel injected is adjusted to improve engine performance.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and Electronic Drive Unit (EDU). EDU controls fuel injectors according to
the input signals to adjust the amount of fuel injected to the preset value.
START CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed
Fuel injection EDU
Camshaft position sensor Piston position
control (start Fuel injectors Suction
Ignition switch Start signal control) control valve
Common rail fuel pressure sensor Common rail fuel pressure
When the ECM receives a start signal from the ignition switch, the ECM
adapts the fuel injection system for the start control. The amount of fuel
injected at engine starting is a preset program value in the ECM. The
program is determined by the engine speed, engine coolant temperature
and common rail fuel pressure.
For better startability under cool engine conditions, the lower the coolant
temperature becomes, the greater the amount of fuel injected. The ECM
ends the start control when the engine speed reaches the specific value, and
shifts the control to the normal or idle control.
SEF648S
EC-398
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
IDLE CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart A
E
When the ECM determines that the engine speed is at idle, the fuel injection system is adapted for the idle
control. The ECM regulates the amount of fuel injected corresponding to changes in load applied to the engine to keep
engine speed constant. The ECM also provides the system with a fast idle control in response to the
engine coolant temperature signal. F
NORMAL CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
G
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed
Fuel injection EDU
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator position control (Nor- Fuel injectors Suction H
Common rail fuel pressure sensor Common rail fuel pressure mal control) control valve
The maximum injection amount is controlled to an optimum by the engine speed, intake air amount, engine coolant
temperature, and accelerator opening in accordance with the driving conditions.
This prevents the oversupply of the injection amount caused by decreased air density at a high altitude or dur- ing a
system failure.
EC-399
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
DECELERATION CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Accelerator pedal released position switch Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection EDU
control (Decel- Fuel injectors Suction
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed eration control) control valve
The ECM sends a fuel cut signal to the fuel injector and suction control valve during deceleration for better fuel
efficiency. The ECM determines the time of deceleration according to signals from the accelerator pedal released
position switch and crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
Fuel Injection Timing Control System EBS00DBC
DESCRIPTION
The target fuel injection timing in accordance with the engine speed and the fuel injection amount are recorded as a map in
the ECM beforehand. The ECM determines the optimum injection timing using sensor signals accordance with the map.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00DBD
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues until the
engine coolant temperature returns to normal.
Fuel Cut Control (At No Load & High Engine Speed) EBS00DBE
If the engine speed is above 2,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,800 rpm) fuel will
be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate
until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-394, "Fuel Injection Control Sys-
tem" .
EC-400
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Crankcase Ventilation System EBS00DBF
DESCRIPTION A
In this system, blow-by gas is sucked into the air duct after oil separation by oil separator in the rocker cover.
EC
INSPECTION H
Ventilation Hose
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose I
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
PBIB0590E
SEC692
M
EC-401
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[YD]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
DESCRIPTION
A water draining cock is on the lower side and a priming pump for bleeding air is on the upper side.
AIR BLEEDING
Pump the priming pump to bleed air.
● When air is bled completely, the pumping of the priming pump
suddenly becomes heavy. Stop the operation at that time.
● If it is difficult to bleed air by the pumping of the priming pump (the
pumping of the priming pump does not become heavy), dis- connect
the fuel supply hose between the fuel filter and the fuel gallery. Then,
perform the operation described above, and make sure that fuel comes
out. (Use a pan, etc. so as not to spill fuel. Do not let fuel get on
engine and other parts.) After that, connect the hose, then bleed air
again.
● Start engine and let it idle for at least one minute after perform- ing air
bleeding.
WATER DRAINING
If the MIL flashes during the engine operation, drain the water as follows. SEF375Y
1. Remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, protector assembly from the dash panel as follows.
a. Remove the air cleaner case (upper), air duct assembly, and vacuum hose for brake booster (between the vacuum
pump and vacuum pipe).
CAUTION:
After the duct is removed, cover the opening with gum tape, etc. to prevent foreign object from
getting into the engine during the operation.
b. Remove the mounting nuts on the dash panel, then remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly
from the dash panel.
● It is not necessary to disconnect the fuel hose.
2. Using a tool such as a pliers, loosen the water draining cock at the
bottom of the fuel filter.
Loosening drain cock four to five turns causes water to
start draining.
Do not remove drain cock by loosening it excessively.
If water does not drain properly, move the priming pump up and
down.
CAUTION:
● When the water is drained, the fuel is also drained. Use a
pan, etc. to avoid fuel adherence to the rubber parts
such as the engine mount insulator.
● Do not over-tighten the water draining cock. This will
damage the cock thread, resulting in water or fuel leak.
3. Bleed air of the fuel filter. Refer to EC-398 .
SMA825B
4. Start the engine, then check that the MIL goes off.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00DBH
DESCRIPTION
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operating to learn the fully released position of the accel- erator pedal
by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed when accelerator work unit or
ECM is replaced.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-402
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[YD]
2. Select “OFF ACCEL PO SIG” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II A
3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is released.
EC
D
4. Touch “CLEAR” and wait a few seconds.
PBIB0411E
E
PBIB0412E
K
Fuel Pressure Relief Valve EBS00DBI
DESCRIPTION
L
When the fuel pressure in common rail increases to excessively high, fuel pressure relief valve opens to carry
PBIB0413E
excess fuel to the return hose.
EC-403 PBIB0467E
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[YD]
5. Select “PRES REGULATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST MODE” with
CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine and keep engine speed 2,000 rpm.
7. Raise fuel pressure to 135 MPa with touching “UP” or “Qu” on the
CONSULT-II screen.
8. Confirm that the fuel does not come out from the fuel pressure relief
valve.
WARNING:
If the fuel comes out, stop the engine immediately.
9. If NG, replace common rail.
PBIB0587E
EC-404
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[YD]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
DTC and MIL Detection Logic EBS00DBJ
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction (DTC) is stored in the ECM memory.
The MIL will light up each time the ECM detects malfunction. For diagnostic items causing the MIL to light up, refer to EC
EC-388, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) EBS00DBK
With CONSULT-II
D
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Example: P0115, P0335, P1233, etc. These
DTCs are prescribed by ISO15031-6.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
E
HOW TO ERASE DTC
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least F
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. G
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF- DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00DBL
EC-405
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[YD]
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedure of NATS
initial- ization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00DBM
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" or
see EC-562 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly after starting engine,
water may have accumulated in fuel filter. drain water from fuel
filter. Refer to EC-398 .
On Board Diagnostic System Function
The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions.
SAT652J
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. (See EC-
562, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .)
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When ECM detects a mal-
WARNING function, the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a mal-
function has been detected.
EC-406
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[YD]
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, CONSULT-II and Driving Patterns
A
EC
PBIB0902E
*1: When a malfunction is detected, MIL *2: MILMIL will not light up after ignition *3: When a malfunction is detected for the
will light up. switch is turned OFF. first time, the DTC will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC will not be displayed any *5: Other screens except SELF-DIAG-
longer after vehicle is driven 40 times NOSTIC RESULTS & DATA MONI-
without the same malfunction. (The TOR (AUTO TRIG) cannot display the
DTC still remain in ECM.) malfunction. DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) can display the malfunction at
the moment it is detected.
EC-407
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel injec- tion
control, fuel injection timing control, glow control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly actuators. It is essential
that both input and output signals are proper and sta- ble. At the same time,
it is important that there are no problems such as vacuum leaks, or other
problems with the engine.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test
with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per- formed.
Follow the EC-405, "WORK FLOW" .
SEF233G
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus- tomer
can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent
ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they
occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the exam- ple on next page should
be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically con-
trolled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
EC-408
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
WORK FLOW
A
EC
PBIB0903E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system cannot be
is other than “0”, perform EC-435, form EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- performed, check main power supply and
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SIS FOR INTERMITTENT ground circuit. Refer to EC-436,
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . INCIDENT" . "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be
detected, perform EC-435, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .
EC-409
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the EC-406,
STEP I
"DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET" .
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the DTC, then erase the DTC. Refer
to EC-401 .
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom
Matrix Chart” will be useful. Refer to EC-411 .) Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA
STEP III MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If
the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the DTC by using
CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and
check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The DTC cannot be
displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to Trouble Diagnosis for DTC PXXXX.
STEP V If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the Basic Inspection, EC-407 . Then perform inspections according to the Symptom
Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-411 .
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for
mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”
mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to
EC-420 or EC-431 .
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is
STEP VI also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-24, "How to Per- form Efficient Diagnosis
for an Electrical Incident" , “Circuit Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If the malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code (DTC P0000) is detected. If the incident is still
STEP VII detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM. (Refer to EC-401
.)
SEF907L
EC-410
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0533
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads applied;
● Headlamp switch is OFF.
● On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
● Air conditioner switch is OFF.
● Rear defogger switch is OFF.
● Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
EC-411
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem.
2. Check the current need for scheduled maintenance, especially for fuel filter and air cleaner filter. Refer to MA-7,
"PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE)" .
3. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or improper connections
– Wiring for improper connections, pinches, or cuts
4. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- ture.
>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Read idle speed.
72525 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK SEF817Y
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.
EC-412
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
5. BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM
A
1. Stop engine.
2. Use priming pump to bleed air from fuel system. Refer to EC-398, "AIR BLEEDING" .
EC
>> GO TO 6.
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle. D
2. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read idle speed.
E
72525 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
7. DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER
Drain water from fuel filter. Refer to EC-398, "WATER DRAINING" . SEF817Y I
>> GO TO 8.
J
8. CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
K
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read idle speed. L
72525 rpm
OK or NG M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace air cleaner filter.
EC-413
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
10. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE
SEF817Y
EC-414
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00DBP
A
SYMPTOM
Reference page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER
POOR ACCELERATION
HI IDLE
LOW IDLE
EC
E
NO START (with first firing)
AT IDLE
DURING DRIVING
WHEN DECELERATING
F
J
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF
Fuel supply pump 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 —
Fuel injector 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 EC-463 K
EDU (Electronic drive unit) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 EC-490
Glow control system 1 1 1 1 1 EC-532
L
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 EM-105
EGR system 3 3 EC-539
Air cleaner and duct 3 3 MA-26 M
Fuel pressure relief valve EC-399
Suction control valve circuit 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-508
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-463
EDU circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-490
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 1 EC-442
ENGINE CONTROL
EC-415
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM
Reference page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER
POOR ACCELERATION
HI IDLE
LOW IDLE
NO START (with first firing)
AT IDLE
DURING DRIVING
WHEN DECELERATING
SYSTEM — Basic engine control system
EC-416
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM A
Reference page
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
D
SYSTEM — Basic engine control system
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
E
EC-417
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM
Reference page
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Warranty symptom code AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA
Camshaft position sensor circuit EC-475
Start signal circuit EC-555
Ignition switch circuit EC-436
Power supply for ECM circuit 1 1 EC-436
ENGINE CONTROL
EC-418
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00DBQ
EC
PBIB0952E
EC-419
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
PBIB0474E
EC-420
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC
PBIB0475E
EC-421
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Circuit Diagram EBS00DBR
TBWA0099E
EC-422
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC
TBWA0170E
EC-423
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00DBS
PREPARATION
PBIB0473E
1. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove
glove box.
PBIB0377E
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-424
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI- A
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
0 - 4V
EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed
PBIB0388E
A B G
[Engine is running]
5 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
A B ● Idle speed
6
H
A
7
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V) I
0.5 - 2.5V
J
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed K
L
A10 R Mass air flow sensor PBIB0389E
1.5 - 3.5V
M
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0390E
EC-425
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Engine is running]
A24 B Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
A25 G/W Injector's ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
Accelerator pedal position
A26 LG/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
A27 W Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
Accelerator pedal position
A28 PU/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor 1 power supply
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0392E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A31 W/L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
0.1 - 14V
B3 W
[Engine is running] (Voltage signals of each ECM ter-
B4 OR/B
EGR volume control valve Warm-up condition minals differ according to the con-
B5 W/L ●
trol position of EGR volume control
B6 GY ● Idle speed valve.)
Fuel injector adjustment
B9 G/B
resistor No.2
Fuel injector adjustment 0.2 - 4.8V
B10 Y/B
resistor No.4 (There are individual differences
Fuel injector adjustment [Ignition switch “ON”] between fuel injector adjustment
B11 R/B resistor No.3 resistors.)
EC-426
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
EC-427
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0.8 - 1.3V
● Accelerator pedal fully released EC
Accelerator pedal position
B15 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.5V
C
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.3 - 1.8V
Accelerator pedal position
B16 G
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] D
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.0V
[Engine is running]
B18 R/G Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
ground
● Idle speed
0 - 3V
F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition G
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition J
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0394E
[Engine is running]
L
B20 L/R Crankshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V M
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
0 - 30V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
EC-428
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0397E
0 - 12.5V
D1 L/OR Tachometer
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0398E
EC-429
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released EC
D25 R/G Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
C
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
D27 B/Y Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “START”]
(11 - 14V)
D
0 - 12.5V
E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
F
H
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm I
J
PBIB0400E
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
E2 LG Cooling fan relay (Low) K
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is operating Approximately 0.1V
[Engine is running]
L
● Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Cooling fan is operating at low speed
E7 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High)
[Engine is running] M
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed Approximately 0.1V
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
EC-430
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Steering wheel is being turned
Power steering oil pres-
E12 P/B
sure switch [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Steering wheel is not being turned (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “Neutral” Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position
E13 G/OR
switch [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0402E
0 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
E21 L/B Vehicle speed sensor ● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH)
PBIB0386E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-431
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START”. A
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
EC
D
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. SEF995X
E
X: Applicable
EC-432
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Regarding items detected in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode, refer to — EC-388, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
DATA MONITOR MODE
ECM
Main
MONITOR ITEM input CONDITION SPECIFICATION
signals
signal
● The engine speed computed from the
CKPS·RPM (TDC) [rpm] crankshaft position sensor (TDC) signal
is displayed.
When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature
circuit is open or short, ECM enters fail-
COOLAN TEMP/S (determined by the signal voltage of the
safe mode. The engine coolant temper-
[C] or [F] engine coolant temperature sen- sor) is
ature determined by the ECM is dis-
displayed.
played.
● The vehicle speed computed form
VHCL SPEED SE
the vehicle speed sensor signal is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
● The fuel temperature (determined by
FUEL TEMP SEN [C] or [F] the signal voltage of the fuel temper-
ature sensor) is displayed.
● The accelerator pedal position sen- sor
ACCEL POS SEN [V]
1 signal voltage is displayed.
● The accelerator pedal position sen- sor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]
2 signal voltage is displayed.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
OFF ACCEL SW [ON/OFF] accelerator pedal released posi- tion
switch signal.
● The common rail fuel pressure
(determined by the signal voltage of
ACT CR PRESS [MPa]
the common rail fuel pressure sen- sor)
is displayed.
● The power supply voltage of ECM is
BATTERY VOLT [V]
displayed.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] the park/neutral position switch sig-
nal.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
START SIGNAL [ON/OFF]
the starter signal.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure
switch signal.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
BRAKE SW [ON/OFF]
the stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
IGN SW [ON/OFF]
ignition switch signal.
● The signal voltage of the mass air
MAS AIR/FL SE [V]
flow sensor is displayed.
● Indicates [CA] of suction control
SUCTION CV [CA]
valve operating angle.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection
MAIN INJ WID [msec] pulse width compensated by ECM
according to the input signals.
● The glow relay control condition
GLOW RLY [ON/OFF] (determined by ECM according to
the input signal) is displayed.
EC-433
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
ECM
Main A
MONITOR ITEM input CONDITION SPECIFICATION
signals
signal
● Indicates the control condition of the
cooling fans (determined by ECM EC
COOLING FAN according to the input signal).
[LOW/HI/OFF] LOW ... Operates at low speed. HI
... Operates at high speed. OFF ...
Stopped
C
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
L
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
M
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
● A/C switch “OFF” ● Harness and connectors
POWER BAL-
● Shift lever “N” Engine runs rough or dies. ● Compression
ANCE
● Cut off each injector signal one at a ● Fuel injectors
time using CONSULT-II
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connector
● Operate the cooling fan at “LOW”, Cooling fan moves at “LOW”, “HI”
speed and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
COOLING FAN “HI” speed and turn “OFF” using
CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan relay
OFF ACCEL PO
● This mode is used for ECM to learn accelerator pedal released positions.
SIG
EC-434
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
● Harness and connector
GLOW RELAY ● Turn the glow relay “ON” and Glow relay makes the operating
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and lis- sound. ● Glow relay
ten to operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON
EGR VOL CONT/ ● Change EGR volume control EGR volume control valve makes an ● Harness and connector
V valve opening step using CON- operating sound. ● EGR volume control valve
SULT-II.
● Ignition switch: ON
● Fuel line
PRES REGULA- ● Change fuel pressure in common Fuel leaks.
TOR ● Fuel pressure relief valve
rail using CONSULT-II
EC-435
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
– If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”.
By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further
A diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC
FUNCTION TEST J
This mode is used to inform customers of their vehicle condition of periodic maintenance.
EC-436
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 2.5V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS AIR/FL SE ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 2.1 - 2.7V
● No-load
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
Shift lever: Neutral position ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Except above OFF
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON START ON OFF ON OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral posi-
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle tion. (Forward direction)
the engine Steering wheel is turned. ON
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
IGN SW ● Ignition switch: ON OFF ON OFF
● Engine: After warming up Idle 30 - 40 MPa
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
ACT CR PRESS ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 40 - 50 MPa
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 70.0 - 71.5CA
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
SUCTION CV ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 73.5 - 75.0CA
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up No-load 0.68 - 0.78 msec
MAIN INJ WID ● Shift lever: Neutral position Air conditioner switch: ON
0.78 - 0.88 msec
● Idle speed Rear window defogger switch: ON
GLOW RLY Refer to EC-532, "GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM" .
● When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
EC-437
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC-438
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
ACCEL POS SEN, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE”
Below is the data for “ACCEL POS SEN”, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” and “MAS AIR/FL SE” when revving engine
quickly up to 3,000 rpm under no load after warming up engine to the normal operating temperature.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
EC-439
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[YD]
TROUBLE
SEF321Y
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description EBS00DBX
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to
normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do EC
not recur on DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections.
Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as
part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific
problem area. C
1. INSPECTION START G
Erase DTCs. Refer to EC-401, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .
H
>> GO TO 2.
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION L
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> Repair or replace.
EC-440
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
A5 B [Engine is running]
A6 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
A7 B ● Idle speed
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A31 W/L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
D18 W/R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
D19 W/R (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
ECM relay (self-shutoff)
D26 G
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EC-441
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DC0
EC
TBWA0101E
EC-442
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DC1
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 6.
No >> GO TO 2.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-443
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
5. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
A
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals A8, A9 and ground with EC
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
C
After turning ignition switch “OFF”,
battery voltage will exist for a few
seconds, then
drop to approximately 0V. D
OK or NG
OK >> Check EDU power supply circuit. Refer to EC-494,
"Diagnostic Procedure" . E
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III PBIB0357E F
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-444
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
8. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-445
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[YD]
13. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals A5, A6, A7 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
Continuity should exist.
EC
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between ter- H
Yes
minals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay. I
PBIB0077E
K
EC-446
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) PFP:22680
The mass air flow sensor (MAFS) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake air flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
air flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is con- trolled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake
air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the
temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air
flow by means of this current change.
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
0.5 - 2.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0389E
1.5 - 3.5V
A10 R Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0390E
[Engine is running]
A24 B Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
A27 W Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
EC-447
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] EC
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
ECM relay (self-shutoff)
D26 G C
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF” (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) D
E
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0100 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Mass air flow sensor F
WITH CONSULT-II
G
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and wait at least 6 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 3 seconds. H
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-445, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
SEF817Y
EC-448
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DC8
TBWA0102E
EC-449
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DC9
Terminal Voltage G
2 Approximately 5V
4 Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
I
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
3. CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
M
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and
engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Check harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM. PBIB0385E
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-450
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
5. CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0
Idle (Engine is warmed up to normal
1.0 - 2.5
operating temperature.)
2,000 rpm (Engine is warmed up to nor-
2.1 - 2.7
mal operating temperature.)
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness
connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
Removal and Installation EBS00DCB
EC-451
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
[YD]
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT) A
PFP:22630
Description
EBS00DCC
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant EC
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in C
temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- mistor decreases as
temperature increases.
D
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant tempera-
Voltage* (V) Resistance (k)
ture C (F)
10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260 H
*:These data are reference values and measured between ECM terminal A11 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DCD
SEF817Y
EC-452
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCF
TBWA0103E
EC-453
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
Check harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-454
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
[YD]
5. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
<Reference data>
EC-455
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Description EBS00DCJ
The accelerator work unit is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The accelerator pedal position
sensor 1, 2 and accelerator pedal released position switch are built into the accelerator work unit. The sensors detect the EC
accelerator pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the sig- nal to determine the amount of fuel to
be injected.
The accelerator pedal released position switch detects accelerator pedal released position and sends the sig-
nal to the ECM. The ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. The signal is also used for diagnosing the C
accelerator pedal position sensor.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
Accelerator pedal released
A21 B position switch ground [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
EC-456
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
Accelerator pedal position
A26 LG/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
Accelerator pedal position
A28 PU/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.8 - 1.3V
Accelerator pedal position
B15 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.5V
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-454, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-457
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCO
EC
TBWA0171E
EC-458
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCP
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2” signal under the
following conditions.
PBIB0404E
EC-459
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect accelerator work unit harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
E
4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminals 7, 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0379E
Voltage: Approximately 5V F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-460
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
7. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal B15 and accelerator work unit terminal 6, ECM terminal B16 and
accelerator work unit terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB0365E
EC-461
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors F30, M63
● Harness for open or short between accelerator work unit and ECM EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
14. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-457, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15. L
EC-462
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check the indication of “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2”
under the following conditions.
Conditions Continuity
Accelerator pedal fully released Should exist.
Accelerator pedal depressed Should not exist.
EC-463
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:16638
A
Description EBS00DCS
The common rail fuel pressure sensor is placed to the common rail. It measures the fuel pressure in the com- mon rail.
The sensor sends voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. EC
The ECM controls the fuel pressure in the common rail by the suction control valve. The ECM uses the signal from
common rail fuel pressure sensor as a feedback signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DCT C
Specification data are reference values.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION H
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
[Engine is running]
A23 B Sensor's ground Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● I
● Idle speed
A27 W Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
[Engine is running] J
● Warm-up condition 1.6 - 1.8V
B13 Y/R Common rail fuel pressure ● Idle speed
B14 Y/R sensor K
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.8 - 2.0V
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
L
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DCV
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-461, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-464
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCX
TBWA0125E
EC-465
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCY
2. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0405E
2. Check harness continuity between common rail fuel pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. K
Continuity should exist.
Check harness for open or short between ECM and common rail fuel pressure sensor.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-466
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
SENSOR [YD]
4. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals B13, B14 and common rail fuel pressure sensor termi- nal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
Condition Voltage V
Idle 1.6 - 1.8
2,000 rpm 1.8 - 2.0
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect common rail fuel
pressure sensor harness connector and connect it again. Then repeat
above check.
5. If NG, replace common rail.
Removal and Installation EBS00DD0
COMMON RAIL
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" . PBIB0588E
EC-467
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Description EBS00DD1
EC
E
The ECM sends the fuel injection signal to EDU (Electronic Drive Unit). Then the EDU sends ON signals to fuel
injectors to operate them.
PBIB0482E
The EDU monitors injector ground circuit and sends the feedback signal to the ECM.
F
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When fuel injec- G
tor receives ON signal from EDU, the coil in the fuel injector is ener-
gized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to
flow through the fuel injector into the cylinder. The amount of fuel
injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is H
the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the
injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
I
J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DD2
EC-468
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0388E
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0392E
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
ECM relay (self-shutoff)
D26 G
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF” (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-469
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
P0202 ● Injector No.2 does not operate normally. (Injector circuit is open or shorted.)
P0203 ● Injector No.3 does not operate normally. ● Electronic drive unit
P0204 ● Injector No.4 does not operate normally. ● Fuel injector
EC-470
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DD5
WITH CONSULT-II A
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 2
seconds.)
C
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-468, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-471
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DD6
TBWA0132E
EC-472
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
EC
TBWA0133E
EC-473
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DD7
Terminals
DTC ECM EDU Cylinder
P0201 A4 4 No.1
P0202 A1 1 No.2
P0203 A3 3 No.3
P0204 A2 2 No.4
Terminals
DTC EDU Fuel injector Cylinder
P0201 9 4 No.1
P0202 12 4 No.2
P0203 10 4 No.3
P0204 11 4 No.4
EC-474
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
3. CHECK FUEL INJECOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check harness continuity fuel injector terminal 3 of malfunctioning cylinder and EDU terminal 13.
Continuity should exist.
EC
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector. M
2. Check continuity between terminals as shown in the figure.
Continuity should exist.
3. If NG, replace fuel injector.
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" . PBIB0406E
EC-475
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR (TDC) PFP:23731
Description EBS00DDA
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA(DC Voltage and Pulse Sig-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR nal)
NO.
[Engine is running]
B20 L/R Crankshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0395E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0396E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-476
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DDD
A
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0335 ● An improper voltage signal from the sensor is sent to ● Harness or connectors
ECM during running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EC
● Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
H
SEF817Y
EC-477
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDF
TBWA0123E
EC-478
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDG
1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. EC
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
C
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB0416E
J
1. Check harness continuity between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminal 2 and ECM terminal B21. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
EC-479
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
EC-480
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0416E
EC-481
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PFP:23731
A
Description EBS00DDJ
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
PBIB0367E
CAUTION: F
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- G
WIRE DATA(DC Voltage and Pulse Sig-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR nal)
NO.
[Engine is running] H
B18 R/G Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
0 - 3V I
[Engine is running] J
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB0393E K
0 - 8V
B19 R/Y Camshaft position sensor
L
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm M
PBIB0394E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V.
EC-482
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 1 second.
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-483
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDN
EC
TBWA0124E
EC-484
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDO
1. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB0381E
1. Check harness continuity between camshaft position sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal B19. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-485
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. A
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
EC
EC-486
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) PFP:32702
Description EBS00DDR
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the 4WD/ABS control unit. The combination meter
then sends a signal to the ECM.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DDS
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINA ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
L NO.
0 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
E21 L/B Vehicle speed sensor ● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH)
PBIB0386E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Lift up the vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal by oscilloscope under the fol-
lowing conditions.
● In 2nd gear position.
SEF864Y
EC-487
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDV
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0172E
EC-488
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0173E
EC-489
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDW
EC-490
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" or DI-21, "COMBINATION METERS (RHD MOD-
ELS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace combination meter.
EC-491
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[YD]
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:23710
A
Description EBS00DDX
The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient
barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. EC
K
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DE0
L
1. INSPECTION START
SEF817Y
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. M
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform EC-485, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , again.
5. Is the DTC P1107 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
EC-492
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[YD]
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-401, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-398 .
EC-493
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR PFP:16700
A
Description EBS00DE1
Fuel temperature sensor is built in the fuel supply pump. The sensor detects the fuel temperature in the fuel supply pump
and calibrates the fuel injection amount change by fuel temperature. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DE2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: E
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- F
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
SEF817Y
EC-494
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DE6
TBWA0116E
EC-495
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DE7
2. CHECK FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. PBIB0420E
2. Check harness continuity between fuel temperature sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
K
Continuity should exist.
Check harness for open or short to between ECM and fuel temperature sensor.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-496
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
DTC P1216 EDU PFP:22710
Description EBS00DE9
PBIB0482E
The ECM sends the fuel injection signal to EDU (Electronic Drive Unit). Then the EDU sends ON signals to fuel
injectors to operate them.
The EDU monitors injector ground circuit and sends the feed back signal to the ECM.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DEA
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0388E
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
A29 W/PU EDU injector check signal ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
EC-497
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
PBIB0391E
EC-498
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
1 - 5V
EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0392E
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] E
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
ECM relay (self-shutoff)
D26 G F
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
K
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 2
seconds.)
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-494, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
SEF817Y
EC-499
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DED
TBWA0118E
EC-500
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
EC
TBWA0119E
EC-501
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEE
1. INSPECTION START
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-502
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
5. CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
ECM terminal EDU terminal
A4 4
A3 3 C
A2 2
A1 1
D
Continuity should exist
EC-503
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
9. CHECK ECM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" .
EC-504
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) PFP:00021
A
Description EBS00DEG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan
control Cooling fan relay
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
C
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, air condi- tioner ON
signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. D
OPERATION
H
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DEH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. K
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
L
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE M
● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
E2 LG Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is operating Approximately 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Cooling fan is operating at low speed
E7 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed
EC-505
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated.
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P1217 ● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Harness or connectors
● Cooling fan system does not operate properly (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
(Overheat). ● Cooling fan
● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the ● Radiator hose
proper filling method. ● Radiator
● Radiator cap
● Water pump
● Thermostat
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
For more information, refer to EC-506, "Main 12 Causes of
Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the MA-22,
"Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00DEK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con- firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-
up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the
proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-500, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
SEF111X
EC-506
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DEL
EC
TBWA0107E
EC-507
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEM
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SEF646X
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC- 504,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF111X
EC-508
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
3. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
A
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 ,
EC
23psi) CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. D
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure. J
Radiator cap relief pressure:
78 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap. L
SLC755A
EC-509
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
80 - 84 C (176 - 183 F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 10 mm/95 C (0.339 in/203 F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5C (9F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND
WATER PIPING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace thermostat.
PBIB0422E
EC-510
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
● 10A fuse EC
● 40A fusible links
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
C
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
I
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 3 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cool-
ing fan motor-1 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
PBIB0479E
Continuity should exist. J
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E2 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-511
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-512 PBIB0424E
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link EC
H
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cool-
ing fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
PBIB0479E
I
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cool- J
ing fan relay-3 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
EC-513
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-42, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT AND WATER PIP-
ING" .
EC-514
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Condition Reference page
A
ON* 3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —
gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driv- See MA-22, "Changing
reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant" . EC
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See MA-23, "REFILLING
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank ENGINE COOLANT" .
tor C
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-176, "CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD" .
D
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-191, "CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. E
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-26, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
F
Component Inspection EBS00DEO
Conditions Continuity H
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2
No current supply No I
Terminals
Speed L
(+) (–)
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor-1 High 1, 2 3, 4
M
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor-2 High 1, 2 3, 4
PBIB0423E
EC-515
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL VALVE PFP:16700
Description EBS00DEP
To control the amount of the fuel inhalation of the fuel supply pump, a suction control valve is built into the fuel supply
pump. When the amount of the fuel inhalation of fuel supply pump increases, the fuel supply pump raises the fuel
exhalation pressure. As a result, the fuel injection pressure is raised. When the load of the engine increases, the ECM
sends a signal to the suction control valve to raise the injection pressure.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO. A
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0400E
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
EC-516
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0402E
EC-517
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE A
NAL ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO. A
0 - 12.5V
EC
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
C
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition F
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DES
WITH CONSULT-II J
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
L
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-511, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-518
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DEU
TBWA0122E
EC-519
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEV
2. CHECK SUCTION CONTROL VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT PBIB0464E
EC-520
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
Component Inspection EBS00DEW
EC-521
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR [YD]
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR PFP:16600
A
Description EBS00DEY
The fuel injector adjustment resistor is built into the fuel injector. The resistance is constant and individual. ECM
uses the individual resistance to determine the fuel injection pulse. EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DEZ
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
C
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
D
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
E
[Engine is running]
A25 G/W Fuel injector's ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
F
Fuel injector adjustment
B9 G/B
resistor No.2
Fuel injector adjustment 0.7 - 2.3V (0.2 - 4.8V) G
B10 Y/B
resistor No.4 (There is an individual differ-
Fuel injector adjustment [Ignition switch “ON”] ence in fuel injector adjust-
B11 R/B resistor No.3 ment resistor.)
H
Fuel injector adjustment
B12 W/B
resistor No.1
WITH CONSULT-II M
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-515, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-522
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DF2
TBWA0128E
EC-523
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DF3
F
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0409E
Voltage: Approximately 5V G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
H
NG >> GO TO 2.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
EC-524
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR [YD]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" . PBIB0415E
EC-525
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK
[YD]
DTC P1305
DTC FUEL LEAK
Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible cause) PFP:17520
A
On Board Diagnosis
P1305 Logic
The relation between the output signal to suction control valve and inputcontrol
Suction signal valve
from common rail fuel pressure sensor is not in normal ra
EBS00DF6
Fuel tube
Common rail
Fuel pressure relief valve
EC
C
WITH CONSULT-II D
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. E
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F
1. INSPECTION START
SEF817Y
I
1. Start engine.
2. Visually check the following for fuel leak.
– Fuel tube from fuel supply pump to common rail J
– Common rail
– Fuel tube from common rail to fuel injector
K
3. Also check for improper connection or pinches.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. L
COMMON RAIL
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" .
EC-526
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK
[YD]
FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
Refer to EM-141, "FUEL SUPPLY PUMP" .
EC-527
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH PFP:18002
A
Description EBS00DFA
The accelerator work unit is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The accelerator pedal position
sensor 1, 2 and accelerator pedal released position switch are built into the accelerator work unit. The sensor detects the EC
accelerator pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the sig- nal to determine the amount of fuel to
be injected.
The accelerator pedal released position switch detects accelerator pedal released position signal and sends
this signal to the ECM. The ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. This signal is also used for diag- C
nosing the accelerator pedal position sensor.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
Accelerator pedal released
A21 B position switch ground [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
EC-528
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
Accelerator pedal position
A26 LG/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
Accelerator pedal position
A28 PU/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.8 - 1.3V
Accelerator pedal position
B15 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.5V
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-522, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-529
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFF
EC
TBWA0177E
EC-530
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFG
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit terminal 4 and ECM terminal A21. Refer to Wir- ing
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
EC-531
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● Harness connectors F30, M63
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH
G
>> INSPECTION END
Conditions Continuity K
Accelerator pedal fully released Should exist.
Accelerator pedal depressed Should not exist.
L
EC-532
DTC P1606 ECM
[YD]
DTC P1606 ECM PFP:23710
Description EBS00DFJ
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and
output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-524, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
1.
SEF817Y
INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform EC-524, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , again.
5. Is DTC P1606 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
EC-533
DTC P1606 ECM
[YD]
2. REPLACE ECM
A
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-401,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)" . EC
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-398, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position
Learning" .
C
>> INSPECTION END
EC-534
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY PFP:25230
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINA ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
L NO.
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
D18 W/R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
D19 W/R (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch Approximately 0V
D24 G “OFF”
D26 G ECM relay (self-shutoff) [Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 20 seconds and then turn
“ON”.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF817Y
EC-535
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFQ
EC
TBWA0121E
EC-536
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFR
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-537
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
4. CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals D24, D26 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace ECM relay.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between J
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay. K
PBIB0077E
M
EC-538
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE
[YD]
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE PFP:AYBGL
The ECM checks if battery voltage is within the tolerance range for the engine control system.
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P1660 ● An abnormally high or low voltage from the battery is ● Incorrect jump starting
sent to ECM. ● Battery
● Alternator
● ECM
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the following.
– Jumper cables are connected for jump starting.
– Battery or alternator has been replaced.
If the result is “Yes” for one item or more, skip the following steps and go to EC-530, "Diagnostic Proce- dure" .
2. Check that the positive battery terminal is connected to battery properly. If NG, reconnect it properly.
3. Check that the alternator functions properly. Refer to SC-12, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Wait one minute.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-530, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If
DTC is not detected, go to next step.
7. Start engine and wait one minute at idle.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-530, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFV
1. INSPECTION START
Check that the proper type of battery and alternator is installed. Refer
to SC-3, "BATTERY" , SC-12, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace with a proper one.
EC-539
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE
[YD]
3. CHECK JUMPER CABLES INSTALLATION
A
Check that the jumper cables are connected in the correct sequence.
EC
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG
SEF439Z >> Reconnect jumper cables properly.
EC-540
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:25230
Description EBS00DFW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed Glow lamp
Glow control Glow relay
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Glow plugs
When engine coolant temperature is more than approximately 80C (176F), the glow relay turns off. When
coolant temperature is lower than approximately 80C (176F):
● Ignition switch ON
After ignition switch has turned to ON, the glow relay turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to engine
coolant temperature, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
● Cranking
The glow relay turns ON, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
● Starting
After engine has started, current continues to flow through glow plug (after-glow mode) for a certain period in
relation to engine coolant temperature.
The glow indicator lamp turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to engine coolant temperature at the time
glow relay is turned ON.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Glow Plug
The glow plug is provided with a ceramic heating element to obtain a
high-temperature resistance. It glows in response to a signal sent from the
ECM, allowing current to flow through the glow plug via the glow relay.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: SEF376Y
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 1.0V
● Glow lamp is “ON”
D2 OR Glow lamp
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Glow lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
E9 W/R Glow relay Refer to EC-532, "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION"
EC-541
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFY
EC
TBWA0108E
EC-542
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFZ
1. INSPECTION START
2. CHECK INSTALLATION
Check that glow plug nut and all glow plug connecting plate nuts are installed
properly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Install properly.
SEF013Y
EC-543
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
4. CHECK GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION
A
1. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates approximately 25C EC
(77F). If NG, cool down engine.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Set voltmeter probe between glow plug and engine body. C
5. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
6. Check the voltage between glow plug and engine body under E
the following conditions.
SEF013Y
Conditions Voltage
F
For 20 seconds after turning ignition
Battery voltage
switch “ON”
More than 20 seconds after turning igni-
Approx. 0V G
tion switch “ON”
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-544
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
7. CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Check combination meter and glow indicator lamp. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" or
DI-21, "COMBINATION METERS (RHD MODELS)" and DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair or replace combination meter or glow indicator lamp.
EC-545 PBIB0427E
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
● 60A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between glow relay and battery EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
14. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW PLUG FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
J
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between glow relay terminal 5 and glow plug harness connector. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
EC-546
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
GLOW RELAY
Check continuity between glow relay terminals 3 and 5 under the fol- lowing
conditions.
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2
No current supply No
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB0428E
GLOW PLUG
1. Remove glow plug connecting plate.
2. Check glow plug resistance.
Resistance: Approximately 0.8 [at 25C
(77F)] NOTE:
● Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped,
replace glow plug with a new one.
● If glow plug is dropped from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in)
or higher, replace with a new one.
● If glow plug installation hole is contaminated with car-
bon, remove it with a reamer or suitable tool.
● Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it two or three times,
then tighten using a tool to specified torque.
GLOW PLUG
Refer to EM-133, "GLOW PLUG" .
EC-547
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14710
A
Description EBS00DG2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
C
Ignition switch Start signal
EGR volume con- EGR volume control
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position trol valve
D
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
E
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve
in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti- mum engine control. The
optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con- F
ditions.
The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions.
● Engine stopped G
● Engine starting
● Low engine coolant temperature
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature H
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR Volume Control Valve M
ThePBIB0954E
EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate
of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It
operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings
are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the
valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow
rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage
signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening.
EC-548
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up After one minute at idle More than 10 steps
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
EGR VOL CON/V ● Shift lever: Neutral position Revving engine from idle to 3,600 0 step
rpm
● No-load
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V)
0.1 - 14V
B3 W
[Engine is running] (Voltage signals of each ECM ter-
B4 OR/B
EGR volume control valve Warm-up condition minals differ according to the con-
B5 W/L ●
trol position of EGR volume control
B6 GY ● Idle speed valve.)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
D26 G ECM relay (self-shutoff)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
EC-549
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DG5
EC
TBWA0109E
EC-550
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DG6
PBIB0430E
EC-551 PBIB0431E
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
A
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 5 and EGR EC
volume control valve terminals 2, 5. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. E
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CON- F
PBIB0377E
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB0432E
J
Check the following.
● Harness connectors E63, F4
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
EC-552
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
7. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB0380E
EC-553
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
2. Check resistance between the following terminals.
● terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3 A
● terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6
6. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control H
valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening.
SEF605Y
J
EC-554
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25230
Description EBS00DG9
The stop lamp switch is installed to brake pedal bracket. The switch senses
brake pedal position and sends an ON-OFF signal to the ECM. The ECM
uses the signal to control the fuel injection control system.
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: PBIB0379E
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
D25 R/G Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
EC-555
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGB
EC
TBWA0187E
EC-556
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
EXCEPT FOR SOUTH AFRICA
TBWA0174E
EC-557
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGC
● 15A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-558
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
PBIB0118E
EC-559
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[YD]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH PFP:31918
A
Description EBS00DGE
When the gear position is in “Neutral”, neutral position is “ON”. ECM detects the position because the continu- ity of
the line (the “ON” signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DGF
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. E
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. F
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. G
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● Gear position is “Neutral” Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position switch
E13 G/OR
[Ignition switch “ON”] H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
EC-560
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGH
TBWA0113E
EC-561
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGI
EC-562
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[YD]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
EC-563
START SIGNAL
[YD]
START SIGNAL PFP:48750
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGJ
EC
TBWA0110E
EC-564
START SIGNAL
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-565
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
[YD]
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH PFP:49761
A
Component Description EBS00DGL
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering
high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. EC
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the fuel injector pulse width to increase the idle speed
and adjust for the increased load.
C
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
I TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V J
● Steering wheel is being turned
Power steering oil pressure
E12 P/B
switch [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Steering wheel is not being turned (11 - 14V)
K
EC-566
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGO
TBWA0115E
EC-567
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGP
2. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0434E
EC-568
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
[YD]
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Conditions Continuity
Steering wheel is being fully turned. Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned. No
EC-569
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
[YD]
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PFP:27500
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGS
EC
TBWA0111E
EC-570
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[YD]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
TBWA0188E
EC-571
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[YD]
Wiring Diagram (Except for South Africa) EBS00G7S
EC
TBWA0176E
EC-572
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) [YD]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00100
Engine YD22DDTi
Idle speed 725 25 rpm
Maximum engine speed 4,900 rpm
EC-573